Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism.pdf (PDFy mirror)

Cutting Through
Spiritual
Materialism

Chogyam Trungpa

Foreword by Sakyong Mipham

Shambhala
Classics

Cm

inn I

Through
Spiritual

Chogyam Trungpa

Foreword by Sakyong Mipham

Edited by John Baker and Marvin Casper

Illustrated by Glen Eddy

.A;

SHAMBHALA

Boston & London
2002

SHAMBHALA PUBLICATIONS, INC.

Horticultural Hall

300 Massachusetts Avenue

Boston, Massachusetts 02115

www.shambhala.com

© 1973 by Chogyam Trungpa

Illustrations © 1973 Shambhala Publications, Inc.

Foreword © 2002 by Sakyong Miphan

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced
in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and
retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher.

10 987654321

Printed in the United States of America

® This edition is printed on acid-free paper that meets
the American National Standards Institute Z39.48 Standard.

Distributed in the United States by Random House, Inc.,
and in Canada by Random House of Canada Ltd

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Trungpa, Chogyam, 1939 —

Cutting through spiritual materialism.

Two lecture series given in Boulder, Colo.

1970-71.

Includes index.

I. Spiritual life (Buddhism) I. Baker, John.

II. Casper, Marvin. III. Title.
BQ4302.178 1987 294. 3' 444 87-4619
ISBN 0-87773-050-4

ISBN r-j-7o62-9_5-7-9

To

Chokyi-lodro the Marpa
Father of the Kagyii hneage

Contents

Foreword

xi

Introduction

3

Spiritual Materialism

13

Surrendering

23

The Guru

31

Initiation

53

Self-Deception

63

The Hard Way

77

The Open Way

91

Sense of Humor

III

The Development of Ego

121

The Six Realms

138

The Four Noble Truths

i^i

The Bodhisattva Path

167

Shunyata

187

Prajna and Compassion

207

Tantra

217

Index

244

Illustrations

Page 12. Senge Dra-dog. The aspect of Padmasambhava who teaches
with the lion's roar that subdues the heretics of hope and fear.

Page 30. Marpa. Father of the Kagyii lineage. Drawn by Sherab
Palden Beru.

Page 52. Tilopa the Guru. The teacher of Naropa.

Page 62. Pig, Snake and Rooster. They represent stupidity, aggres-
sion, and passion.

Page 76. Lohan. An arhat in meditation posture, a disciple of the
Buddha. William Rockhill Nelson Gallery of Art, Kansas City, Mo.

Page 110. The Coil of Joy.

Page 120. The Portrait of Samsara.

Page 150. Shakyamuni Buddha in Earth-witness Mudra and Dis-
ciples Shariputra and Mahamaudgalyayana.

Page 166. The Three Principle Bodhisattvas^Avalokiteshvara, Man-
jushri and Vajrapani. They represent the aspects of the enlightened
state— compassion, knowledge and power.

Page 186. Prajnaparamita. The Mother of all the Buddhas, the
Ground of all Dharmas.

Page 216. Vajradhara and Consort. The personification of Shakya-
muni Buddha teaching Tantra. Symbol of the Absolute in its polarity
aspect.

Foreword

The inspiration to find the truth, to see what is real, and to lead a
genuine life — the culmination of which can be enlightenment — is
what underlies every spiiitual journey. However, embarking on
this journey is rarely as straightfonvard as we may wish. The jour-
ney toward enlightenment ultimately may be both profound and
simple, yet the process of understanding that simplicity tends to be
multidimensional, if not downright complicated. For in order to
understand a spiritual path, we must acknowledge and understand
our own mind, now, as it pertains to the journey. What misunder-
standings and concepts we may have about a spiritual practice,
we must overcome so that we're not merely practicing according
to our own conceptualized idea. Ego, and the myriad games it
plays to unravel our inspiration for enlightenment, must always be
monitored.

To understand the essential qualities of the spiritual path,
especially what obstacles or conundrums might lie ahead, we need
a clear sense of direction. We need teachings, instructions, and
guidance from someone who has traveled the path and therefore
can give valid and confident advice about how others could travel
this same path. This is what is offered by my father, Chogyam
Trungpa, in Cutting through Spiritual Materialism.

These lectures and teachings were given in the early 1970s, at
a crossroads of heightened awareness and spiritual awakening in

xii Foreword

the United States. East was beginning to meet West. Having turned
away from their parents' values, a whole generation was investi-
gating newly available spiritual paths — many of them quite tradi-
tional. People wanted a path that would help them rise above
life's mundane trappings to see a more expansive view, a view
that would dissolve their feeling of alienation and penetrate life's
very meaning. At the same time, many of these seekers were still
trying to figure out what a genuine path to liberation was. There
was a quality of freshness, exuberance, excitement, and youth, as
well as naivete.

People were naive about the many pitfalls possible on any
path. Spiritual awakening is not a happy-go-lucky endeavor. The
path of truth is profound — and so are the obstacles and possibili-
ties for self-deception. No matter what the practice or teaching,
ego loves to wait in ambush to appropriate spirituality for its
own survival and gain. Chogyam Trungpa — who had just arrived in
the States from Scotland — tried to clarify these issues. He wanted
to raise people's awareness to a level where they could distinguish
between what is genuine spiritual progress and what is ego hijack-
ing spirituality for its own purposes. He wanted to help them learn
to recognize the grip of the Three Lords of Materialism — strategies
that ego can use any time, any place, in order to seduce us from a
bigger view back into its self-limiting perspective.

From an early age, Chogyam Trungpa had undergone an ardu-
ous education in the monasteries of Kham, on the high plateau of
Tibet's eastern region. Even the medieval culture of Tibet was not
immune to the perils of spiritual materialism. His teachers had
trained him in recognizing the wiliness of ego and in avoiding
seduction into seemingly beneficial activities that are really just
mundane material pursuits in sacred garments. Here was a teacher
who clearly understood the materialistic dilemma of the spiritual
path, one who had been steeped and trained in the ancient wis-
dom of the past — and who could also understand the nuances of

Foreword xiii

modern-day Western-style spiritual blockage. The teachings in this
book represent a milestone in the introduction of buddhadharma
into American culture.

In part because of the playfulness with which my father
taught his young American students, Cutting Through Spiritual
Materialism has become a classic. For those in the audience who
were experimenting with rejecting society in order to pursue an
idealistic, transcendental path, his teachings shed new light on
working with themselves in the context of their own country, fami-
ly, and culture. As an enthusiastic newcomer to the West and a
spiritual elder as well, he was able to introduce to them the basic
workability of their own situation as part of the spiritual path.
Rejecting everything was not the solution. Training one's mind,
body, and speech in accordance with the truth would bring about
the understanding and wisdom that produces peace. Many of those
students followed his advice, continuing on their spiritual journeys
and at the same time becoming parents, teachers, business people,
and even dharma teachers. These people have now become the
elders for a new generation of inquisitive minds.

Even though the message of this book was addressed to a
particular group at a particular time in history, it is not only for that
generation. These teachings will never be dated or pigeonholed. In
the last thirty years, in our continuing pursuit of whatever will dis-
tract us from the truth of pain and suffering, we have become even
more materialistic. In the spiritual realm, there are now even more
paths and possibilities to explore than when this book was first
published — not just the classic spiritual disciplines, but also many
hybrids. This book continues to have the power to sharpen our
awareness of spiritual materialism. It deserves our careful atten-
tion, as its message is more applicable now than ever.

Sakyong Mipham Rinpoche
October 2001

CUTTING THROUGH
SPIRITUAL MATERIALISM

Introduction

The following series of talks was given in Boulder, Colorado
in the fall of 1970 and the spring of 1971. At that time we
were just forming Karma Dzong, our meditation center in
Boulder. Although most of my students were sincere in their
aspiration to walk on the spiritual path, they brought to it a
great deal of confusion, misunderstanding and expectation.
Therefore, I found it necessary to present to my students an
overview of the path and some warnings as to the dangers
along that path.

It now seems that publishing these talks may be helpful to
those who have become interested in spiritual disciplines.
Walking the spiritual path properly is a very subtle process;
it is not something to jump into naively. There are numerous
sidetracks which lead to a distorted, ego-centered version of
spirituality ; we can deceive ourselves into thinking we are de-
veloping spiritually when instead we are strengthening our
egocentricity through spiritual techniques. This fundamental
distortion may be referred to as spiritual materialism.

These talks first discuss the various ways in which people
involve themselves with spiritual materialism, the many forms
of self-deception into which aspirants may fall. After this tour
of the sidetracks along the way, we discuss the broad outlines
of the true spiritual path.

4 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

The approach presented here is a classical Buddhist one —
not in a formal sense, but in the sense of presenting the heart
of the Buddhist approach to spirituality. Although the Bud-
dhist way is not theistic, it does not contradict the theistic dis-
ciplines. Rather the differences between the ways are a matter
of emphasis and method. The basic problems of spiritual
materialism are common to all spiritual disciplines. The Bud-
dhist approach begins with our confusion and suffering and
works toward the unraveling of their origin. The theistic ap-
proach begins with the richness of God and works toward
raising consciousness so as to experience God's presence. But
since the obstacles to relating with God are our confusions and
negativities, the theistic approach must also deal with them.
Spiritual pride, for example, is as much a problem in theistic
disciplines as in Buddhism.

According to the Buddhist tradition, the spiritual path is the
process of cutting through our confusion, of uncovering the
awakened state of mind. When the awakened state of mind is
crowded in by ego and its attendant paranoia, it takes on the
character of an underlying instinct. So it is not a matter of
building up the awakened state of mind, but rather of burning
out the confusions which obstruct it. In the process of burning
out these confusions, we discover enlightenment. If the process
were otherwise, the awakened state of mind would be a pro-
duct, dependent upon cause and effect and therefore liable to
dissolution. Anything which is created must, sooner or later,
die. If enlightenment were created in such a way, there would
always be the possibility of ego reasserting itself, causing a
return to the confused state. Enlightenment is permanent be-
cause we have not produced it; we have merely discovered it.
In the Buddhist tradition the analogy of the sun appearing
from behind the clouds is often used to explain the discovery
of enlightenment. In meditation practice we clear away the

Introduction 5

confusion of ego in order to glimpse the awakened state. The
absence of ignorance, of being crowded in, of paranoia, opens
up a tremendous view of life. One discovers a different way of
being.

The heart of the confusion is that man has a sense of self
which seems to him to be continuous and solid. When a thought
or emotion or event occurs, there is a sense of someone being
conscious of what is happening. You sense that you are read-
ing these words. This sense of self is actually a transitory, dis-
continuous event, which in our confusion seems to be quite
solid and continuous. Since we take our confused view as be-
ing real, we struggle to maintain and enhance this solid self.
We try to feed it pleasures and shield it from pain. Experi-
ence continually threatens to reveal our transitoriness to us,
so we continually struggle to cover up any possibility of dis-
covering our real condition. "But," we might ask, "if our real
condition is an awakened state, why are we so busy trying to
avoid becoming aware of it?" It is because we have become so
absorbed in our confused view of the world, that we consider
it real, the only possible world. This struggle to maintain the
sense of a solid, continuous self is the action of ego.

Ego, however, is only partially successful in shielding us
from pain. It is the dissatisfaction which accompanies ego's
struggle that inspires us to examine what we are doing. Since
there are always gaps in our self-consciousness, some insight
is possible.

An interesting metaphor used in Tibetan Buddhism to de-
scribe the functioning of ego is that of the "Three Lords of
Materialism": the "Lord of Form," the "Lord of Speech," and
the "Lord of Mind." In the discussion of the Three Lords
which follows, the words "materialism" and "neurotic" refer
to the action of ego.

The Lord of Form refers to the neurotic pursuit of physical

6 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

comfort, security and pleasure. Our highly organized and
technological society reflects our preoccupation with manipu-
lating physical surroundings so as to shield ourselves from the
irritations of the raw, rugged, unpredictable aspects of life.
Push-button elevators, pre-packaged meat, air conditioning,
flush toilets, private funerals, retirement programs, mass pro-
duction, weather satellites, bulldozers, fluorescent lighting,
nine-to-five jobs, television — all are attempts to create a man-
ageable, safe, predictable, pleasurable world.

The Lord of Form does not signify the physically rich and
secure life-situations we create per se. Rather it refers to the
neurotic preoccupation that drives us to create them, to try to
control nature. It is ego's ambition to secure and entertain it-
self, trying to avoid all irritation. So we cling to our pleasures
and possessions, we fear change or force change, we try to
create a nest or playground.

The Lord of Speech refers to the use of intellect in relating
to our world. We adopt sets of categories which serve as
handles, as ways of managing phenomena. The most fully de-
veloped products of this tendency are ideologies, the systems
of ideas that rationalize, justify and sanctify our lives. Na-
tionalism, communism, existentialism, Christianity, Buddhism
— all provide us with identities, rules of action, and interpre-
tations of how and why things happen as they do.

Again, the use of intellect is not in itself the Lord of Speech.
The Lord of Speech refers to the inclination on the part of ego
to interpret anything that is threatening or irritating in such
a way as to neutralize the threat or turn it into something
"positive" from ego's point of view. The Lord of Speech re-
fers to the use of concepts as filters to screen us from a direct
perception of what is. The concepts are taken too seriously;
they are used as tools to solidify our world and ourselves. If

Introduction 7

a world of nameable things exists, then "I" as one of the name-
able things exists as well. We wish not to leave any room for
threatening doubt, uncertainty or confusion.

The Lord of Mind refers to the effort of consciousness to
maintain awareness of itself. The Lord of Mind rules when we
use spiritual and psychological disciplines as the means of
maintaining our self-consciousness, of holding onto our sense
of self. Drugs, yoga, prayer, meditation, trances, various psy-
chotherapies — all can be used in this way.

Ego is able to convert everything to its own use, even spiri-
tuality. For example, if you have learned of a particularly
beneficial meditation technique of spiritual practice, then
ego's attitude is, first to regard it as an object of fascination
and, second to examine it. Finally, since ego is seeming solid
and cannot really absorb anything, it can only mimic. Thus
ego tries to examine and imitate the practice of meditation
and the meditative way of life. When we have learned all the
tricks and answers of the spiritual game, we automatically try
to imitate spirituality, since real involvement would require
the complete elimination of ego, and actually the last thing
we want to do is to give up the ego completely. However, we
cannot experience that which we are trying to imitate; we can
only find some area within the bounds of ego that seems to
be the same thing. Ego translates everything in terms of its
own state of health, its own inherent qualities. It feels a sense
of great accomplishment and excitement at having been able
to create such a pattern. At last it has created a tangible ac-
complishment, a confirmation of its own individuality.

If we become successful at maintaining our self-conscious-
ness through spiritual techniques, then genuine spiritual de-
velopment is highly unlikely. Our mental habits become so
strong as to be hard to penetrate. We may even go so far as

8 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

to achieve the totally demonic state of complete "Egohood."

Even though the Lord of Mind is the most powerful in sub-
verting spirituality, still the other two Lords can also rule the
spiritual practice. Retreat to nature, isolation, simple, quiet,
high people — all can be ways of shielding oneself from irri-
tation, all can be expressions of the Lord of Form. Or perhaps
religion may provide us with a rationalization for creating a
secure nest, a simple but comfortable home, for acquiring an
amiable mate, and a stable, easy job.

The Lord of Speech is involved in spiritual practice as well.
In following a spiritual path we may substitute a new religious
ideology for our former beliefs, but continue to use it in the
old neurotic way. Regardless of how sublime our ideas may
be, if we take them too seriously and use them to maintain
our ego, we are still being ruled by the Lord of Speech.

Most of us, if we examine our actions, would probably
agree that we are ruled by one or more of the Three Lords.
"But," we might ask, "so what? This is simply a description
of the human condition. Yes, we know that our technology
cannot shield us from war, crime, illness, economic insecurity,
laborious work,- old age and death; nor can our ideologies
shield us from doubt, uncertanity, confusion and disorienta-
tion; nor can our therapies protect us from the dissolution of
the high states of consciousness that we may temjjorarily
achieve and the disillusionment and anguish that follow. But
what else are we to do? The Three Lords seem too powerful
to overthrow, and we don't know what to replace them with."

The Buddha, troubled by these questions, examined the
process by which the Three Lords rule. He questioned why
our minds follow them and whether there is another way. He
discovered that the Three Lords seduce us by creating a funda-
mental myth: that we are solid beings. But ultimately the myth
is false, a huge hoax, a gigantic fraud, and it is the root of

Introduction 9

our suffering. In order to make this discovery he had to break
through very elaborate defenses erected by the Three Lords
to prevent their subjects from discovering the fundamental
deception which is the source of their power. We cannot in any
way free ourselves from the domination of the Three Lords
unless we too cut through, layer by layer, the elaborate de-
fenses of these Lords.

The Lords' defenses are created out of the material of our
minds. This material of mind is used by the Lords in such a
way as to maintain the basic myth of solidity. In order to see
for ourselves how this process works we must examine our
own experience. "But how," we might ask, "are we to conduct
the examination? What method or tool are we to use?" The
method that the Buddha discovered is meditation. He discov-
ered that struggling to find answers did not work. It was only
when there were gaps in his struggle that insights came to him.
He began to realize that there was a sane, awake quality with-
in him which manifested itself only in the absence of struggle.
So the practice of meditation involves "letting be."

There have been a number of misconceptions regarding
meditation. Some people regard it as a trancelike state of
mind. Others think of it in terms of training, in the sense of
mental gymnastics. But meditation is neither of these, al-
though it does involve dealing with neurotic states of mind.
The neurotic state of mind is not difficult or impossible to deal
with. It has energy, speed and a certain pattern. The practice
of meditation involves letting be — trying to go with the pat-
tern, trying to go with the energy and the speed. In this way
we learn how to deal with these factors, how to relate with
them, not in the sense of causing them to mature in the way
we would like, but in the sense of knowing them for what they
are and working with their pattern.

There is a story regarding the Buddha which recounts how

].0 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

he once gave teaching to a famous sitar player who wanted to
study meditation. The musician asked, "Should 1 control my
mind or should I completely let go?" The Buddha answered,
"Since you are a great musician, tell me how you would tune
the strings of your instrument." The musician said, "1 would
make them not too tight and not too loose." "Likewise," said
the Buddha, "in your meditation practice you should not im-
pose anything too forcefully on your mind, nor should you let
it wander." That is the teaching of letting the mind be in a
very open way, of feeling the flow of energy without trying
to subdue it and without letting it get out of control, of going
with the energy pattern of mind. This is meditation practice.

Such practice is necessary generally because our thinking
pattern, our conceptualized way of conducting our life in the
world, is either too manipulative, imposing itself upon the
world, or else runs completely wild and uncontrolled. There-
fore, our meditation practice must begin with ego's outermost
layer, the discursive thoughts which continually run through
our minds, our mental gossip. The Lords use discursive
thought as their first line of defense, as the pawns in their
effort to deceive us. The more we generate thoughts, the busier
we are mentally and the more convinced we are of our exis-
tence. So the Lords are constantly trying to activate these
thoughts, trying to create a constant overlapping of thoughts
so that nothing can be seen beyond them. In true meditation
there is no ambition to stir up thoughts, nor is there an ambi-
tion to suppress them. They are just allowed to occur spon-
taneously and become an expression of basic sanity. They
become the expression of the precision and the clarity of the
awakened state of mind.

If the strategy of continually creating overlapping thoughts
is penetrated, then the Lords stir up emotions to distract us.

Introduction 11

The exciting, colorful, dramatic quality of the emotions cap-
tures our attention as if we were watching an absorbing film
show. In the practice of meditation we neither encourage emo-
tions nor repress them. By seeing them clearly, by allowing
them to be as they are, we no longer permit them to serve as
a means of entertaining and distracting us. Thus they become
the inexhaustible energy which fulfills egoless action.

In the absence of thoughts and emotions the Lords bring up
a still more powerful weapon, concepts. Labeling phenomena
creates a feeling of a solid definite world of "things." Such a
solid world reassures us that we are a solid, continuous thing
as well. The world exists, therefore I, the perceiver of the
world, exist. Meditation involves seeing the transparency of
concepts, so that labeling no longer serves as a way of solidify-
ing our world and our image of self. Labeling becomes simply
the act of discrimination. The Lords have still further defense
mechanisms, but it would be too complicated to discuss them
in this context.

By the examination of his own thoughts, emotions, concepts
and the other activities of mind, the Buddha discovered that
there is no need to struggle to prove our existence, that we
need not be subject to the rule of the Three Lords of Material-
ism. There is no need to struggle to be free; the absence of
struggle is in itself freedom. This egoless state is the attain-
ment of Buddhahood. The process of transforming the ma-
terial of mind from expressions of ego's ambition into ex-
pressions of basic sanity and enlightenment through the
practice of meditation — this might be said to be the true spiri-
tual path.

spiritual Materialism

We have come here to learn about spirituality. I trust the
genuine quality of this search but we must question its nature.
The problem is that ego can convert anything to its own use,
even spirituality. Ego is constantly attempting to acquire and
apply the teachings of spirituality for its own benefit. The
teachings are treated as an external thing, external to "me,"
a philosophy which we try to imitate. We do not actually want
to identify with or become the teachings. So if our teacher
speaks of renunciation of ego, we attempt to mimic renuncia-
tion of ego. We go through the motions, make the appropriate
gestures, but we really do not want to sacrifice any part of our
way of life. We become skillful actors, and while playing deaf
and dumb to the real meaning of the teachings, we find some
comfort in pretending to follow the path.

Whenever we begin to feel any discrepancy or conflict be-
tween our actions and the teachings, we immediately interpret
the situation in such a way that the conflict is smoothed over.
The interpreter is ego in the role of spiritual advisor. The
situation is like that of a country where church and state are
separate. If the policy of the state is foreign to the teachings
of the church, then the automatic reaction of the king is to go
to the head of the church, his spiritual advisor, and ask his

14 Culling Through Spiritual Materialism

blessing. The head of the church then works out some justifi-
cation and gives the policy his blessing under the pretense
that the king is the protector of the faith. In an individual's
mind, it works out very neatly that way, ego being both king
and head of the church.

This rationalization of the spiritual path and one's actions
must be cut through if true spirituality is to be realized. How-
ever, such rationalizing is not easy to deal with because every-
thing is seen through the filter of ego's philosophy and logic,
making all appear neat, precise and very logical. We attempt
to find a self-justifying answer for every question. In order to
reassure ourselves, we work to fit into our intellectual scheme
every aspect of our lives which might be confusing. And our
effort is so serious and solemn, so straight-forward and sin-
cere, that it is difficult to be suspicious of it. We always trust
the "integrity" of our spiritual advisor.

It does not matter what we use to achieve self-justification:
the wisdom of sacred books, diagrams or charts, mathematical
calculations, esoteric formulae, fundamentalist religion, depth
psychology, or any other mechanism. Whenever we begin to
evaluate, deciding that we should or should not do this or that,
then we have already associated our practice or our knowledge
with categories, one pitted against the other, and that is spiri-
tual materialism, the false spirituality of our spiritual advisor.
Whenever we have a dualistic notion such as, "1 am doing
this because I want to achieve a particular state of conscious-
ness, a particular state of being," then automatically we sepa-
rate ourselves from the reality of what we are.

If we ask ourselves, "What is wrong with evaluating, with
taking sides?", the answer is that, when we formulate a secon-
dary judgment, "I should be doing this and should avoid do-
ing that," then we have achieved a level of complication which

Spiritual Materialism 15

takes us a long way from the basic simplicity of what we are.
The simplicity of meditation means just experiencing the ape
instinct of ego. If anything more than this is laid onto our
psychology, then it becomes a very heavy, thick mask, a suit
of armor.

It is important to see that the main point of any sj)iritual
practice is to step out of the bureaucracy of ego. This means
stepping out of ego's constant desire for a higher, more spiri-
tual, more transcendental version of knowledge, religion, vir-
tue, judgment, comfort or whatever it is that the particular
ego is seeking. One must step out of spiritual materialism. If
we do not step out of spiritual materialism, if we in fact prac-
tice it, then we may eventually find ourselves possessed of a
huge collection of spiritual paths. We may feel these spiritual
collections to be very precious. We have studied so much. We
may have studied Western philosophy or Oriental philosophy,
practiced yoga or perhaps have studied under dozens of great
masters. We have achieved and we have learned. We believe
that we have accumulated a hoard of knowledge. And yet,
having gone through all this, there is still something to give
up. It is extremely mysterious! How could this happen? Im-
possible! But unfortunately it is so. Our vast collections of
knowledge and experience are just part of ego's display, part
of the grandiose quality of ego. We display them to the world
and, in so doing, reassure ourselves that we exist, safe and
secure, as "spiritual" people.

But we have simply created a shop, an antique shop. We
could be specializing in oriental antiques or medieval Chris-
tian antiques or antiques from some other civilization or time,
but we are, nonetheless, running a shop. Before we filled our
shop with so many things the room was beautiful: white-
washed walls and a very simple floor with a bright lamp burn-

J 6 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

ing in the ceiling. There was one object of art in the middle
of the room and it was beautiful. Everyone who came appre-
ciated its beauty, including ourselves.

But we were not satisfied and we thought, "Since this one
object makes my room so beautiful, if 1 get more antiques, my
room will be even more beautiful." So we began to collect,
and the end result was chaos.

We searched the world over for beautiful objects — India,
Japan, many different countries. And each time we found an
antique, because we were dealing with only one object at a
time, we saw it as beautiful and thought it would be beautiful
in our shop. But when we brought the object home and put it
there, it became just another addition to our junky collection.
The beauty of the object did not radiate out any more, be-
cause it was surrounded by so many other beautiful things. It
did not mean anything anymore. Instead of a room full of
beautiful antiques we created a junk shop!

Proper shopping does not entail collecting a lot of informa-
tion or beauty, but it involves fully appreciating each indi-
vidual object. This is very important. If you really appreciate
an object of beauty, then you completely identify with it and
forget yourself. It is like seeing a very interesting, fascinating
movie and forgetting that you are the audience. At that mo-
ment there is no world; your whole being is that scene of that
movie. It is that kind of identification, complete involvement
with one thing. Did we actually taste it and chew it and swal-
low it properly, that one object of beauty, that one spiritual
teaching? Or did we merely regard it as a part of our vast and
growing collection?

I place so much emphasis on this point because 1 know that
all of us have come to the teachings and })ractice of medita-
tion not to make a lot of money, but because we genuinely

Spiritual Materialism 17

want to learn, want to develop ourselves. But, if we regard
knowledge as an antique, as "ancient wisdom" to be collected,
then we are on the wrong path.

As far as the lineage of teachers is concerned, knowledge is
not handed down like an antique. Rather, one teacher experi-
ences the truth of the teachings, and he hands it down as in-
spiration to his student. That inspiration awakens the student,
as his teacher was awakened before him. Then the student
hands down the teachings to another student and so the process
goes. The teachings are always up to date. They are not "an-
cient wisdom," an old legend. The teachings are not passed
along as information, handed down as a grandfather tells tra-
ditional folk tales to 'his grandchildren. It does not work that
way. It is a real experience.

There is a saying in the Tibetan scriptures: "Knowledge
must be burned, hammered and beaten like pure gold. Then
one can wear it as an ornament." So when you receive spiritual
instruction from the hands of another, you do not take it un-
critically, but you burn it, you hammer it, you beat it, until
the bright, dignified color of gold appears. Then you craft it
into an ornament, whatever design you like, and you put it on.
Therefore, dharma is applicable to every age, to every per-
son; it has a living quality. It is not enough to imitate your
master or guru; you are not trying to become a replica of
your teacher. The teachings are an individual })ersonal experi-
ence, right down to the present holder of the doctrine.

Perhaps many of my readers are familiar with the stories
of Naropa and Tilopa and Marpa and Milarepa and Gampopa
and the other teachers of the Kagyii lineage. It was a living
experience for them, and it is a living experience for the pre-
sent holders of the lineage. Only the details of their life-situa-
tions are different. The teachings have the quality of warm,

18 Culling Through Spirilual Materialism

fresh baked bread; the bread is still warm and hot and fresh.
Each baker must apply the general knowledge of how to make
bread to his particular dough and oven. Then he must per-
sonally experience the freshness of this bread and must cut it
fresh and eat it warm. He must make the teachings his own
and then must practice them. It is a very living process. There
is no deception in terms of collecting knowledge. We must
work with our individual experiences. When we become con-
fused, we cannot turn back to our collection of knowledge and
try to find some confirmation or consolation: "The teacher and
the whole teaching is on my side." The spiritual path does
not go that way. It is a lonely, individual i)ath.

Q: Do you think spiritual materialism is a particularly
American problem?

A: Whenever teachings come to a country from abroad, the
problem of spiritual materialism is intensified. At the moment
America is, without any doubt, fertile ground ready for the
teachings. And because America is so fertile, seeking spiri-
tuality, it is possible for America to inspire charlatans. Char-
latans would not choose to be charlatans unless they were in-
spired to do so. Otherwise, they would be bank robbers or
bandits, inasmuch as they want to make money and become
famous. Because America is looking so hard for spirituality,
religion becomes an easy way to make money and achieve
fame. So we see charlatans in the role of student, chela, as
well as in the role of guru. I think America at this })articular
time is a very interesting ground.

Q: Have you accepted any spiritual master as a guru, any
particular living spiritual master?

A: At present there is no one. I left my gurus and teachers

Spiritual Materialism 19

behind in Tibet, physically, but the teachings stay with me
and continue.

Q : So who are you following, more or less?

A: Situations are the voice of my guru, the presence of my

guru.

Q: After Shaky amuni Buddha attained enlightenment, was
there some trace of ego left in him so that he could carry on
his teachings?

A; The teaching just happened. He did not have the desire
to teach or not to teach. He spent seven weeks sitting under
the shade of a tree and walking along the bank of a river.
Then someone just happened along and he began to speak.
One has no choice; you are there, an open person. Then the
situation presents itself and teaching happens. That is what is
called "Buddha activity."

Q: It is difficult not to be acquisitive about spirituality. Is
this desire for acquisitions something that is shed along the
way?

A: You should let the first impulse die down. Your first
impulse towards spirituality might put you into some par-
ticular spiritual scene; but if you work with that impulse,
then the impulse gradually dies down and at some stage be-
comes tedious, monotonous. This is a useful message. You
see, it is essential to relate to yourself, to your own experience,
really. If one does not relate to oneself, then the spiritual path
becomes dangerous, becomes purely external entertainment,
rather than an organic personal experience.

Q: If you decide to seek your way out of ignorance, you
can almost definitely assume that anything you do that feels

20 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

good will be beneficial to the ego and actually blocking the
path. Anything that seems right to you will be wrong, any-
thing that doesn't turn you upside-down will bury you. Is there
any way out of this?

A: If you perform some act which is seemingly right, it
does not mean that it is wrong, for the very reason that wrong
and right are out of the picture altogether. You are not work-
ing on any side, neither the "good" side nor the "bad" side,
but you are working with the totality of the whole, beyond
"this" and "that." I would say there is complete action. There
is no partial act, but whatever we do in connection with good
and bad seems to be a partial act.

Q: If you are feeling very confused and trying to work your
way out of the confusion, it would seem that you are trying
too hard. But if you do not try at all, then are we to under-
stand that we are fooling ourselves?

A: Yes, but that does not mean that one has to live by the
extremes of trying too hard or not trying at all. One has to
work with a kind of "middle way," a complete state of "being
as you are." We could describe this with a lot of words, but
one really has to do it. If you really start living the middle
way, then you will see it, you will find it. You must allow
yourself to trust yourself, to trust in your own intelligence.
We are tremendous })eo])le, we have tremendous things in us.
We simply have to let ourselves be. External aid cannot help.
If you are not willing to let yourself grow, then you fall into
the self-destructive process of confusion. It is self-destruction
rather than destruction by someone else. That is why it is
effective; because it is se//-destruction.

Q: What is faith? Is it useful?

A: Faith could be simple-minded, trusting, blind faith, or it

Spiritual Materialism 21

could be definite confidence which cannot be destroyed. Blind
faith has no inspiration. It is very naive. It is not creative,
though not exactly destructive. It is not creative because your
faith and yourself have never made any connection, any com-
munication. You just blindly accepted the Vi^hole belief, very
naively.

In the case of faith as confidence, there is a living reason
to be confident. You do not expect that there will be a pre-
fabricated solution mysteriously presented to you. You work
with existing situations without fear, without any doubt about
involving yourself. This approach is extremely creative and
positive. If you have definite confidence, you are so sure of
yourself that you do not have to check yourself. It is absolute
confidence, real understanding of what is going on now, there-
fore you do not hesitate to follow other paths or deal in what-
ever way is necessary with each new situation.

Q: What guides you on the path?

A: Actually, there does not seem to be any particular guid-
ance. In fact, if someone is guiding you, that is suspicious,
because you are relying on something external. Being fully
what you are in yourself becomes guidance, but not in the sense
of vanguard, because you do not have a guide to follow. You
do not have to follow someone's tail, but you sail along. In
other words, the guide does not walk ahead of you, but walks
with you.

Q: Could you say something more about the way in which
meditation short-circuits the protective mechanisms of the ego?
A: The protective mechanism of ego involves checking one-
self, which is an unnecessary kind of self-observance. Medi-
tation is not based on meditating on a particular subject by
checking oneself; but meditation is complete indentification

22 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

with whatever techniques you are employing. Therefore there
will be no effort to secure oneself in the practice of meditation.

Q: I seem to be living in a spiritual junkyard. How can I
make it into a simple room with one beautiful object?
A: In order to develop an appreciation of your collection
you have to start with one item. One has to find a stepping
stone, a source of inspiration. Perhaps you would not have to
go through the rest of the items in your collection if you
studied just one piece of material. That one piece of material
could be a sign-post that you managed to confiscate in New
York City, it could be as insignificant as that. But one must
start with one thing, see its simplicity, the rugged quality of
this piece of junk or this beautiful antique. If we could man-
age to start with just one thing, then that would be the equiva-
lent of having one object in an empty room. I think it is a ques-
tion of finding a stepping stone. Because we have so many
possessions in our collection, a large part of the problem is that
we do not know where to begin. One has to allow one's instinct
to determine which will be the first thing to pick up.

Q: Why do you think that people are so protective of their
egos? Why is it so hard to let go of one's ego?
A: People are afraid of the emptiness of space, or the
absence of company, the absence of a shadow. It could be a
terrifying experience to have no one to relate to, nothing to
relate with. The idea of it can be extremely frightening, though
not the real experience. It is generally a fear of space, a fear
that we will not be able to anchor ourselves to any solid
ground, that we will lose our identity as a fixed and solid and
definite thing. This could be very threatening.

Surrender in

At this point we may have come to the conclusion that we
should drop the whole game of spiritual materialism; that is,
we should give up trying to defend and improve ourselves.
We may have glimpsed that our struggle is futile and may
wish to surrender, to completely abandon our efforts to de-
fend ourselves. But how many of us could actually do this?
It is not as simple and easy as we might think. To what degree
could we really let go and be open? At what point would we
become defensive?

In this lecture we will discuss surrendering, particularly in
terms of the relationship between work on the neurotic state
of mind and work with a personal guru or teacher. Surrender-
ing to the "guru" could mean opening our minds to life-
situations as well as to an individual teacher. However, if our
life-style and inspiration is working toward an unfolding of
the mind, then we will almost certainly find a personal guru
as well. So in the next few talks we will emphasize relating
to a personal teacher.

One of the difficulties in surrendering to a guru is our pre-
conceptions regarding him and our expectations of what will
happen with him. We are preoccupied with ideas of what we
would like to experience with our teacher: "I would like to

24 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

see this; that would be the best way to see it; I would like to
experience this particular situation, because it is in exact
accordance with my expectation and fascination."

So we try to fit things into pigeonholes, try to fit the situa-
tion to our expectations, and we cannot surrender any part of
our anticipation to all. If we search for a guru or teacher, we
expect him to be saintly, peaceful, quiet, a simple and yet
wise man. When we find that he does not match our expecta-
tions, then we begin to be disappointed, we begin to doubt.

In order to establish a real teacher-student relationship it
is necessary for us to give up all our preconceptions regarding
that relationship and the condition of opening and surrender.
"Surrender" means opening oneself completely, trying to get
beyond fascination and expectation.

Surrender also means acknowledging the raw, rugged,
clumsy and shocking qualities of one's ego, acknowledging
them and surrendering them as well. Generally, we find it
very difficult to give out and surrender our raw and rugged
qualities of ego. Although we may hate ourselves, at the same
time we find our self-hatred a kind of occupation. In spite of
the fact that we may dislike what we are and find that self-
condemnation painful, still we cannot give it up completely.
If we begin to give up our self-criticism, then we may feel that
we are losing our occupation, as though someone were taking
away our job. We would have no further occupation if we
were to surrender everything; there would be nothing to hold
on to. Self-evaluation and self-criticism are, basically, neu-
rotic tendencies which derive from our not having enough
confidence in ourselves, "confidence" in the sense of seeing
what we are, knowing what we are, knowing that we can afford
to open. We can afford to surrender that raw and rugged neu-

Surrendering 25

rotic quality of self and step out of fascination, step out of
preconceived ideas.

We must surrender our hopes and expectations, as well as
our fears, and march directly into disappointment, work with
disappointment, go into it and make it our way of life, which
is a very hard thing to do. Disappointment is a good sign of
basic intelligence. It cannot be compared to anything else:
it is so sharp, precise, obvious and direct. If we can oj)en, then
we suddenly begin to see that our expectations are irrelevant
compared with the reality of the situations we are facing. This
automatically brings a feeling of disappointment.

Disappointment is the best chariot to use on the path of the
dharma. It does not confirm the existence of our ego and its
dreams. However, if we are involved with spiritual material-
ism, if we regard spirituality as a part of our accumulation
of learning and virtue, if spirituality becomes a way of build-
ing ourselves up, then of course the whole process of surren-
dering is completely distorted. If we regard sjnrituality as a
way of making ourselves comfortable, then whenever we ex-
perience something unpleasant, a disappointment, we try to
rationalize it: "Of course this must be an act of wisdom on
the part of the guru, because 1 know, I'm quite certain the
guru doesn't do harmful things. Guruji is a perfect being and
whatever Guruji does is right. Whatever Guruji does is for
me, because he is on my side. So I can afford to open. I can
safely surrender. I know that I am treading on the right path."
Something is not quite right about such an attitude. It is, at
best, simple-minded and naive. We are captivated by the awe-
some, inspiring, dignified and colorful aspect of "Guruji."
We dare not contemplate any other way. We develop the con-
viction that whatever we experience is jjart of our spiritual

26 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

development. "I've made it, I have experienced it, I am a
self-made person and I know everything, roughly, because I've
read books and they confirm my beliefs, my rightness, my
ideas. Everything coincides."

We can hold back in still another way, not really surrend-
ering because we feel that we are very genteel, sophisticated
and dignified people. "Surely we can't give ourselves to this
dirty, ordinary street-scene of reality." We have the feeling
that every step of the path we tread should be a lotus petal
and we develop a logic that interprets whatever happens to
us accordingly. If we fall, we create a soft landing which pre-
vents sudden shock. Surrendering does not involve preparing
for a soft landing; it means just landing on hard, ordinary
ground, on rocky, wild countryside. Once we o])en ourselves,
then we land on what is.

Traditionally, surrendering is symbolized by such practices
as prostration, which is the act of falling on the ground in a
gesture of surrender. At the same time we open psychologically
and surrender com})letely by identifying ourselves with the
lowest of the low, acknowledging our raw and rugged quality.
There is nothing that we fear to lose once we identify ourselves
with the lowest of the low. By doing so, we prepare ourselves
to be an emj)ty vessel, ready to receive the teachings.

In the Buddhist tradition, there is this basic formula: "I
take refuge in the Buddha, I take refuge in the dharma, I take
refuge in the sangha." I take refuge in the Buddha as the
example of surrender, the example of acknowledging nega-
tivity as a part of our makeup and o])ening to it. I take refuge
in the dharma — dharma, the "law of existence," life as it is.
I am willing to open my eyes to the circumstances of life as
they are. I am not willing to view them as spiritual or mystical,
but I am willing to see the situations of life as they really are.

Surrendering 27

I take refuge in the sangha. "Sangha" means "community of
people on the spiritual ])ath," "companions." I am willing to
share my experience of the whole environment of life with
my fellow pilgrims, my fellow searchers, those who walk with
me; but I am not willing to lean on them in order to gain
support. I am only willing to walk along with them. There is
a very dangerous tendency to lean on one another as we tread
the path. If a group of peojde leans one upon the other, then
if one should happen to fall down, everyone falls down. So
we do not lean on anyone else. We just walk with each other,
side by side, shoulder to shoulder, working with each other,
going with each other. This approach to surrendering, this
idea of taking refuge is very profound.

The wrong way to take refuge involves seeking shelter —
worshipping mountains, sun gods, moon gods, deities of any
kind simply because they would seem to be greater than we.
This kind of refuge-taking is similar to the response of the
little child who says, "If you beat me, I'll tell my mommy,"
thinking that his mother is a great, archetypically powerful
person. If he is attacked, his automatic recourse is to his
mother, an invincible and all-knowing, all-powerful person-
ality. The child believes his mother can protect him, in fact
that she is the only person who can save him. Taking refuge
in a mother or father-princii)le is truly self-defeating; the
refuge-seeker has no real basic strength at all, no true inspira-
tion. He is constantly busy assessing greater and smaller
powers. If we are small, then someone greater can crush us.
We seek refuge because we cannot afford to be small and
without protection. We tend to be apologetic: "I am such a
small thing, but I acknowledge your great quality. I would
like to worshi]) and join your greatness, so will you please
protect me?"

28 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism.

Surrendering is not a question of being low and stupid, nor
of wanting to be elevated and profound. It has nothing to do
with levels and evaluation. Instead, we surrender because we
would like to communicate with the world "as it is." We do
not have to classify ourselves as learners or ignorant peo})le.
We know where we stand, therefore we make the gesture of
surrendering, of opening, which means communication, link,
direct communication with the object of our surrendering.
We are not embarrassed about our rich collection of raw,
rugged, beautiful and clean qualities. We present everything
to the object of our surrendering. The basic act of surrender
does not involve the worship of an external power. Rather it
means working together with inspiration, so that one becomes
an open vessel into which knowledge can be poured.

Thus openness and surrendering are the necessary prepara-
tion for working with a spiritual friend. We acknowledge our
fundamental richness rather than bemoan the imagined pov-
erty of our being. We know we are worthy to receive the
teachings, worthy of relating ourselves to the wealth of the
opportunities for learning.

i he Uuru

Coming to the study of spirituality we are faced with the
problem of our relationship with a teacher, lama, guru, what-
ever we call the person we suppose will give us spiritual
understanding. These words, esjjecially the term "guru," have
acquired meanings and associations in the West which are
misleading and which generally add to the confusion around
the issue of what it means to study with a spiritual teacher.
This is not to say that people in the .East understand how to
relate to a guru while Westerners do not; the problem is uni-
versal. People always come to the study of spirituality with
some ideas already fixed in their minds of what it is they are
going to get and how to deal with the person from whom they
think they will get it. The very notion that we will get some-
thing from a guru — ha])piness, peace of mind, wisdom, what-
ever it is we seek — is one of the most difficult preconceptions
of all. So 1 think it would be helpful to examine the way in
which some famous students dealt with the i)roblems of how
to relate to spirituality and a spiritual teacher. Perhaps these
examples will have some relevance for our own individual
search.

One of the most renowned Tibetan masters and also one of
the main gurus of the Kagyu lineage, of which 1 am a member.

32 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

was Marpa, student of the Indian teacher Naropa and guru to
Milarepa, his most famous spiritual son. Marpa is an example
of someone who was on his way to becoming a successful self-
made man. He was born into a farming family, but as a youth
he became ambitious and chose scholarship and the priesthood
as his route to prominence. We can imagine what tremendous
effort and determination it must have taken for the son of a
farmer to raise himself to the position of priest in his local
religious tradition. Tliere were only a few ways for such a man
to achieve any kind of position in 10th century Tibet — as a
merchant, a bandit, or especially as a priest. Joining the
local clergy at that time was roughly equivalent to becoming
a doctor, lawyer and college professor, all rolled into one.

Marpa began by studying Tibetan, Sanskrit, several other
languages and the spoken language of India. After about three
years of such study he was proficient enough to begin earning
money as a scholar, and with this money he financed his re-
ligious study, eventually becoming a Buddhist priest of sorts.
Such a position brought with it a certain degree of local promi-
nence, but Marpa was more ambitious and so, although he
was married by now and had a family, he continued to save
his earnings until he had amassed a large amount of gold.

At this point Marpa announced to his relatives his intentions
to travel to India to collect more teachings. India at this time
was the world center for Buddhist studies, home of Nalanda
University and the greatest Buddhist sages and scholars. It
was Marpa's intention to study and collect texts unknown in
Tibet, bring them home and translate them, thus establishing
himself as a great scholar-translator. The journey to India
was at that time and until fairly recently a long and dangerous
one, and Marpa's family and elders tried to dissuade him from

The Guru

33

it. But he was determined and so set out accompanied by a
friend and fellow scholar.

After a difficult journey of some months they crossed the
Himalayas into India and proceeded to Bengal where they
went their separate ways. Both men were well qualified in the
study of language and religion, and so they decided to search
for their own teachers, to suit their own tastes. Before parting
they agreed to meet again for the journey home.

While he was travelling through Nepal, Marpa had hap-
pened to hear of the teacher Naropa, a man of enormous fame.
Naropa had been abbot of Nalanda University, perhaps the
greatest center for Buddhist studies the world has ever known.
At the height of his career, feeling that he understood the
sense but not the real meaning of the teachings, he abandoned
his post and set out in search of a guru. For twelve years he
endured terrific hardship at the hands of his teacher Tilopa,
until finally he achieved realization. By the time Marpa heard
of him, he was reputed to be one of the greatest Buddhist saints
ever to have lived. Naturally Marpa set out to find him.

Eventually Marpa found Naropa living in poverty in a
simple house in the forests of Bengal. He had expected to find
so great a teacher living in the midst of a highly evolved re-
ligious setting of some sort, and so he was somewhat disap-
pointed. However, he was a bit confused by the strangeness
of a foreign country and willing to make some allowances,
thinking that perhaps this was the way Indian teachers lived.
Also, his appreciation of Naropa's fame outweighed his dis-
appointment, and so he gave Naropa most of his gold and
asked for teachings." He explained that he was a married man,
a priest, scholar and farmer from Tibet, and that he was not
willing to give up this life he had made for himself, but that

34 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

he wanted to collect teachings to take back to Tibet to translate
in order to earn more money. Naropa agreed to Marpa's re-
quests quite easily, gave Marpa instruction, and everything
wenl smoothly.

After some time Marpa decided that he had collected
enough teachings to suit his purposes and j)repared to return
home. He proceeded to an inn in a large town where he re-
joined his travelling companion, and the two sat down to
compare the results of their efforts. When his friend saw what
Marpa had collected, he laughed and said, "What you have
here is worthless! We already have those teachings in Tibet.
You must have found something more exciting and rare. I
found fantastic teachings which I received from very great
masters."

Marpa, of course, was extremely frustrated and upset,
having come such a long way and with so much difficulty and
expense, so he decided to return to Naropa and try once more.
When he arrived at Naropa's hut and asked for more rare and
exotic and advanced teachings, to his surprise Naropa told
him, "I'm sorry, but you can't receive these teachings from
me. You will have to go and receive these from someone else,
a man named Kukuripa. The journey is difficult, especially so
because Kukuripa lives on an island in the middle of a lake
of poison. But he is the one you will have to see if you want
these teachings."

By this time Marpa was becoming desperate, so he decided
to try the journey. Besides, if Kukuripa had teachings which
even the great Naropa could not give him and, in addition,
lived in the middle of a poisonous lake, then he must be quite
an extraordinary teacher, a great mystic.

So Marpa made the journey and managed to cross the lake
to the island where he began to look for Kukuripa. There he

Tlie Guru .35

found an old Indian man living in filth in the midst of hun-
dreds of female dogs. The situation was outlandish, to say the
least, but Marpa nevertheless tried to speak to Kukuripa. All
he got was gibberish. Kukuripa seemed to be speaking com-
plete nonsense.

Now the situation was almost unbearable. Not only was
Kukuripa's speech completely unintelligible, but Marpa had
to constantly be on guard against the hundreds of bitches.
As soon as he was able to make a relationship with one dog,
another would bark and threaten to bite him. Finally, almost
beside himself, Marpa gave up altogether, gave up trying to
take notes, gave up trying to receive any kind of secret
doctrine. And at that point Kukuripa began to speak to him
in a totally intelligible, coherent voice and the dogs stopped
harrassing him and Marpa received the teachings.

After Marpa had finished studying with Kukuripa, he re-
turned once more to his original guru, Naropa. Naropa told
him, "Now you must return to Tibet and teach. It isn't enough
to receive the teachings in a theoretical way. You must go
through certain life experiences. Then you can come back
again and study further."

Once more Marpa met his fellow searcher and together
they began the long journey back to Tibet. Marpa's companion
had also studied a great deal and both men had stacks of
manuscripts and, as they proceeded, they discussed what they
had learned. Soon Marpa began to feel uneasy about his
friend, who seemed more and more inquisitive to discover
what teachings Marpa had collected. Their conversations to-
gether seemed to turn increasingly around this subject, until
finally his travelling companion decided that Marpa had ob-
tained more valuable teachings than himself, and so he became
quite jealous. As they were crossing a river in a ferry, Marpa's

36 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

colleague began to complain of being uncomfortable and
crowded by all the baggage they were carrying. He shifted
his position in the boat, as if to make himself more comfort-
able, and in so doing managed to throw all of Marpa's manu-
scripts into the river. Marpa tried desperately to rescue them,
but they were gone. All the texts he had gone to such lengths
to collect had disappeared in an instant.

So it was with a feeling of great loss that Marpa returned
to Tibet. He had many stories to tell of his travels and studies,
but he had nothing solid to prove his knowledge and experi-
ence. Nevertheless, he spent several years working and teach-
ing until, to his surprise, he began to realize that his writings
would have been useless to him, even had he been able to
save them. While he was in India he had only taken written
notes on those parts of the teachings he had not understood.
He had not written down those teachings which were part of
his own experience. It was only years later that he discovered
that they had actually become a part of him.

With this discovery Marpa lost all desire to profit from the
teachings. He was no longer concerned with making money
or achieving prestige but instead was inspired to realize en-
lightenment. So he collected gold dust as an offering to Naropa
and once again made the journey to India. This time he went
full of longing to see his guru and desire for the teachings.

However, Marpa's next encounter with Naropa was quite
different than before. Naropa seemed very cold and imper-
sonal, almost hostile, and his first words to Marpa were, "Good
to see you again. How much gold have you for my teachings?"
Marpa had brought a large amount of gold but wanted to save
some for his expenses and the trip home, so he opened his
pack and gave Naropa only a portion of what he had. Naropa
looked at the olfering and said, "No, this is not enough. I

The Guru 37

need more gold than this for my teaching. Give me all your
gold." Marpa gave him a bit more and still Naro})a demanded
all, and this v^ent on until finally Naropa laughed and said,
"Do you think you can buy my teaching with your dece})tion?"
At this point Marpa yielded and gave Naropa all the gold he
had. To his shock, Naropa picked up the bags and began
flinging the gold dust in the air.

Suddenly Marpa felt extremely confused and paranoid. He
could not understand what was happening. He had worked
hard for the gold to buy the teaching he so wanted. Naropa
had seemed to indicate that he needed the gold and would
teach Marpa in return for it. Yet he was throwing it away!
Then Naropa said to him, "What need have I of gold? The
whole world is gold for me!"

This was a great moment of opening for Marpa. He opened
and was able to receive teaching. He stayed with Naropa for
a long time after that and his training was quite austere, but
he did not simply listen to the teachings as before; he had to
work his way through them. He had to give up everything he
had, not just his material possessions, but whatever he was
holding back in his mind had to go. It was a continual ju'ocess
of opening and surrender.

In Milarepa's case, the situation developed quite differently.
He was a peasant, much less learned and sophisticated than
Marpa had been when he met Naropa, and he had committed
many crimes including murder. He was miserably unhappy,
yearned for enlightenment, and was willing to pay any fee
that Marpa might ask. So Marpa had Milarepa pay on a very
literal physical level. He had him build a series of houses for
him, one after the other, and after each was completed Marpa
would tell Milarepa to tear the house down and put all the
stones back where he had found them, so as not to mar the

38 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

landscape. Each time Marpa ordered Milarepa to dismantle
a house, he would give some absurd excuse, such as having
been drunk when he ordered the house built or never having
ordered such a house at all. And each time Milarepa, full of
longing for the teachings, would tear the house down and
start again.

Finally Marpa designed a tower with nine stories. Milarepa
suffered terrific physical hardship in carrying the stones and
building the house and, when he had finished, he went to
Marpa and once more asked for the teachings. But Marpa
said to him, "You want to receive teachings from me, just like
that, merely because you built this tower for me? Well, I'm
afraid you will still have to give me a gift as an initiation fee."

By this time Milarepa had no possessions left whatsoever,
having spent all his time and labor building towers. But
Damema, Marpa's wife, felt sorry for him and said, "These
towers you have built are such a wonderful gesture of devo-
tion and faith. Surely my husband won't mind if I give you
some sacks of barley and a roll of cloth for your initiation
fee." So Milarepa took the barley and cloth to the initiation
circle where Marpa was teaching and offered them as his fee,
along with the gifts of the other students. But Marpa, when
he recognized the gift, was furious and shouted at Milare})a,
"These things belong to me, you hypocrite! You try to de-
ceive me!" And he literally kicked Milarepa out of the initia-
tion circle.

At this point Milare))a gave up all hope of ever getting
Marpa to give him the teachings. In despair, he decided to
commit suicide and was just about to kill himself when Marpa
came to him and told him that he was ready to receive the
teaching.

The process of receiving teaching depends upon the student

The Guru 39

giving something in return; some kind of psychological sur-
render is necessary, a gift of some sort. This is why we must
discuss surrendering, opening, giving up expectations, before
we can speak of the relationship between teacher and student.
It is essential to surrender, to open yourself, to present what-
ever you are to the guru, rather than trying to present yourself
as a worthwhile student. It does not matter how much you are
willing to pay, how correctly you behave, how clever you are
at saying the right thing to your teacher. It is not like having
an interview for a job or buying a new car. Whether or not
you will get the job depends upon your credentials, how well
you are dressed, how beautifully your shoes are polished, how
well you speak, how good your manners are. If you are buy-
ing a car, it is a matter of how much money you have and
how good your credit is.

But when it comes to spirituality, something more is re-
quired. It is not a matter of applying for a job, of dressing uj)
to impress our ])otential employer. Such deception does not
apply to an interview with a guru, because he sees right
through us. He is amused if we dress up especially for the
interview. Making ingratiating gestures is not applicable in
this situation; in fact it is futile. We must make a real com-
mitment to being o})en with our teacher; we must be willing
to give up all our preconceptions. Milarepa exi)ected. Marpa
to be a great scholar and a saintly person, dressed in yogic
costume with beads, reciting mantras, meditating. Instead he
found Marpa working on his farm, directing the laborers and
plowing his land.

I am afraid the word "guru" is overused in the West. It
would be better to s])eak of one's "spiritual friend," because
the teachings emphasize a mutual meeting of two minds. It
is a matter of mutual communication, rather than a master-

40 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

servant relationship between a highly evolved being and a
miserable, confused one. In the master-servant relationship
the highly evolved being may appear not even to be sitting
on his seat but may seem to be floating, levitating, looking
down at us. His voice is penetrating, pervading space. Every
word, every cough, every movement that he makes is a gesture
of wisdom. But this is a dream. A guru should be a spiritual
friend who communicates and presents his qualities to us, as
Marpa did with Milarepa and Naropa with Marpa. Marpa
presented his quality of being a farmer-yogi. He happened
to have seven children and a wife, and he looked after his
farm, cultivating the land and supporting himself and his
family. But these activities were just an ordinary part of his
life. He cared for his students as he cared for his crops and
family. He was so thorough, paying attention to every detail
of his life, that he was able to be a competent teacher as well
as a competent father and farmer. There was no physical or
spiritual materialism in Marpa's life-style at all. He did not
emphasize spirituality and ignore his family or his physical
relationship to the earth. If you are not involved with ma-
terialism, either spiritually or physically, then there is no
emphasis made on any extreme.

Nor is it helpful to choose someone for your guru simply
because he is famous, someone who is renowned for having
published stacks of books and converted thousands or millions
of people. Instead the guideline is whether or not you are able
actually to communicate with the person, directly and thor-
oughly. How much self-deception are you involved in? If you
really open yourself to your spiritual friend, then you are
bound to work together. Are you able to talk to him thoroughly
and properly? Does he know anything about you? Does he
know anything about himself, for that matter? Is the guru

The Guru 41

really able to see through your masks, communicate with you
properly, directly? In searching for a teacher, this seems to
be the guideline rather than fame or wisdom.

There is an interesting story of a group of people who de-
cided to go and study under a great Tibetan teacher. They
had already studied somewhat with other teachers, but had
decide to concentrate on trying to learn from this particular
person. They were all very anxious to become his students and
so sought an audience with him, hut this great teacher would
not accept any of them. "Under one condition only will I
accept you," he said. "If you are willing to renounce your
previous teachers." They all pleaded with him, telling him
how much they were devoted to him, how great his reputation
was, and how much they would like to study with him. But
he would not accept any of them unless they would meet his
condition. Finally all except one person in the party decided
to renounce their previous teachers, from whom they had in
fact learned a great deal. The guru seemed to be quite happy
when they did so and told them all to come back the next day.
But when they returned he said to them, "I understand your
hypocrisy. The next time you go to another teacher you will
renounce me. So get out." And he chased them all out except
for the one person who valued what he had learned previously.
The person he accepted was not willing to play any more
lying games, was not willing to try to please a guru by pre-
tending to be different from what he was. If you are going to
make friends with a spiritual master, you must make friends
simply, openly, so that the communication takes place between
equals, rather than trying to win the master over to you.

In order to be accepted by your guru as a friend, you have
to open yourself completely. And in order that you might
open, you will probably have to undergo tests by your spiritual

42 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

friend and by life situations in general, all of these tests taking
the form of disappointment. At some stage you will doubt that
your spiritual friend has any feeling, any emotion toward you
at all. This is dealing with your own hypocrisy. The hypocrisy,
the pretense and basic twist of ego, is extremely hard; it has
a very thick skin. We tend to wear suits of armor, one over
the other. This hypocrisy is so dense and multi-levelled that,
as soon as we remove one layer of our suit of armor, we find
another beneath it. We hope we will not have to completely
undress. We hope that stripping off only a few layers will
make us presentable. Then we appear in our new suit of armor
with such an ingratiating face, but our spiritual friend does
not wear any armor at all; he is a naked person. Compared
with his nakedness, we are wearing cement. Our armor is so
thick that our friend cannot feel the texture of our skin, our
bodies. He cannot even see our faces properly. There are
many stories of teacher-student relationships in the past in
which the student had to make long journeys and endure many
hardships until his fascination and impulses began to wear
out. This seems to be the point: the impulse of searching for
something is, in itself, a hang-up. When this impulse begins
to wear out, then our fundamental basic nakedness begins to
appear and the meeting of the two minds begins to take place.

It has been said that the first stage of meeting one's spirit-
ual friend is like going to a supermarket. You are excited
and you dream of all the different things that you are going
to buy: the richness of your spiritual friend and the colorful
qualities of his personality. The second stage of your rela-
tionship is like going to court, as though you were a criminal.
You are not able to meet your friend's' demands and you
begin to feel self-conscious, because you -know that he knows

The Guru' 43

as much as you know about yourself, which is extremely em-
barrassing. In the third stage when you go to see your spiritual
friend, it is like seeing a cow happily grazing in a meadow.
You just admire its peacefulness and the landscape and then
you pass on. Finally the fourth stage with one's spiritual
friend is like passing a rock in the road. You do not even
pay attention to it; you just pass by and walk away.

At the beginning a kind of courtship with the guru is taking
place, a love affair. How much are you able to win this per-
son over to you? There is a tendency to want to be closer to
your spiritual friend, because you really want to learn. You
feel such admiration for him. But at the same time he is very
frightening; he puts you off. Either the situation does not
coincide with your expectations or there is a self-conscious
feeling that "I may not be able to open completely and thor-
oughly." A love-hate relationship, a kind of surrendering
and running away process develops. In other words, we begin
to play a game, a game of wanting to open, wanting to be
involved in a love affair with our guru, and then wanting to
run away from him. If we get too close to our spiritual friend,
then we begin to feel overpowered by him. As it says in the
old Tibetan proverb: "A guru is like a fire. If you get too
close you get burned; if you stay too far away you don't get
enough heat." This kind of courtship takes place on the part
of the student. You tend to get too close to the teacher, but
once you do, you get burned. Then you want to run away
altogether.

Eventually the relationship begins to become very sub-
stantial and solid. You begin to realize that wanting to be
near and wanting to be far away from the guru is simply
your own game. It has nothing to do with the real situation.

44 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

but is just your own hallucination. The guru or spiritual
friend is always there burning, always a life-fire. You can
play games with him or not, as you choose.

Then the relationship with one's s])iritual friend begins to
become very creative. You accept the situations of being
overwhelmed by him and distant from him. If he decides to
play the role of cold icy water, you accept it. If he decides
to play the role of hot fire, you accept it. Nothing can shake
you at all and you come to a reconciliation with him.

The next stage is that, having accepted everything your
spiritual friend might do, you begin to lose your own inspira-
tion because you have completely surrendered, completely
given up. You feel yourself reduced to a speck of dust. You
are insignificant. You begin to feel that the only world that
exists is that of this spiritual friend, the guru. It is as though
you were watching a fascinating movie; the movie is so ex-
citing that you become part of it. There is no you and no
cinema hall, no chairs, no people watching, no friends sitting
next to you. The movie is all that exists. This is called the
"honeymoon period" in which everything is seen as a part
of this central being, the guru. You are just a useless, in-
significant person who is continuously being fed by this great,
fascinating central being. Whenever you feel weak or tired
or bored, you go and just sit in the cinema hall and are
entertained, uplifted, rejuvenated. At this point the phenom-
enon of the personality cult becomes prominent. The guru is
the only person in the world who exists, alive and vibrant.
The very meaning of your life depends upon him. If you die,
you die for him. If you live, you survive for him and are
insignificant.

However, this love affair with your spiritual friend cannot
last forever. Sooner or later its intensity must wane and you

The Guru 45

must face your own life-situation and your own psychology.
It is like having married and finished the honeymoon. You
not only feel conscious of your lover as the central focus of
your attention, but you begin to notice his or her life-style as
well. You begin to notice what it is that makes this })erson a
teacher, beyond the limits of his individuality and person-
ality. Thus the principle of the "universality of the guru"
comes into the picture as well. Every problem you face in
life is a part of your marriage. Whenever you experience
difficulties, you hear the words of the guru. This is the point
at which one begins to gain one's independence from the guru
as lover, because every situation becomes an expression of
the teachings. First you surrendered to your spiritual friend.
Then you communicated and played games with him. And
now you have come to the state of complete openness. As a
result of this openness you begin to see the guru-quality in
every life-situation, that all situations in life offer you the
opportunity to be as open as you are with the guru, and so
all things can become the guru.

Milarepa had a vivid vision of his guru Marpa while he
was meditating in very strict retreat in Red Rock Jewel
Valley. Weak with hunger and battered by the elements, he
had fainted while trying to collect firewood outside his cave.
When he regained consciousness, he looked to the east and
saw white clouds in the direction where Marpa lived. With
great longing he sang a song of supplication, telling Marpa
how much he longed to be with him. Then Marpa appeared
in a vision, riding a white snow lion, and said to him some-
thing like, "What is the matter with you? Have you had a
neurotic upheaval of some sort? You understand the dharma,
so continue to practice meditation." Milarepa took comfort
and returned to his cave to meditate. His reliance and de-

46 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

pendence upon Marpa at this point indicates that he had not
yet freed himself from the notion of guru as personal, indi-
vidual friend.

However, when Milarepa returned to his cave, he found
it full of demons with eyes as big as saucepans and bodies
the size of thumbs. He tried all kinds of ploys to get them to
stop mocking and tormenting him, but they would not leave
until Milarepa finally stopped trying to play games, until he
recognized his own hypocrisy and gave in to openness. From
this point on you see a tremendous change of style in Milare-
pa's songs, because he had learned to identify with the uni-
versal quality of guru, rather than solely relating to Marpa
as an individual person.

The spiritual friend becomes part of you, as well as being
an individual, external person. As such the guru, both in-
ternal and external, plays a very important part in penetrat-
ing and exposing our hypocrisies. The guru can be a person
who acts as a mirror, reflecting you, or else your own basic
intelligence takes the form of the spiritual friend. When the
internal guru begins to function, then you can never escape
the demand to open. The basic intelligence follows you every-
where; you cannot escape your own shadow. "Big Brother
is watching you." Though it is not external entities who are
watching us and haunting us; we haunt ourselves. Our own
shadow is watching us.

We could look at it in two different ways. We could see
the guru as a ghost, haunting and mocking us for our hypoc-
risy. There could be a demonic quality in realizing what we
are. And yet there is always the creative quality of the spirit-
ual friend which also becomes a part of us. The basic intel-
ligence is continuously present in the situations of life. It is
so sharp and penetrating that at some stage, even if you want

The Guru 47

to get rid of it, you cannot. Sometimes it has a stern expres-
sion, sometimes an inspiring smile. It has been said in the
Tantric tradition that you do not see the face of the guru, but
you see the expression of his face all the time. Either smiling,
grinning, or frowning angrily, it is part of every life-situation.
The basic intelligence, tathagata-garbha, Buddha-nature, is
always in every experience life brings us. There is no escap-
ing it. Again it is said in the teachings: "Better not to begin.
Once you begin, better to finish it." So you had better not
step onto the spiritual path unless you must. Once you have
stepped foot on the path, you have really done it, you cannot
step back. There is no way of escaping.

Q: Having stumbled around various spiritual centers, I feel
that a personality like Marpa must be a very troublesome
phenomenon for most addicts along these lines. For here is a
man who seems not to be doing any of the things that every-
body says will get you there. He's not ascetic, he doesn't
abnegate. He looks after his everyday affairs. He is a normal
human being and yet, apparently, he is a teacher of enormous
capability. Is Marpa the only one who has made the most of
the possibilities for a normal man without going through all
the tremendous pain of asceticism and the discipline of puri-
fication?

A: Of course Marpa is an example of the possibilities open
to us. However, he did experience tremendous discipline and
training while he was in India. By studying strenuously under
Indian teachers he prepared his path. But I think we must
understand the true meaning of the words "discipline" and
"asceticism." The basic idea of asceticism, leading a life ac-
cording to the dharma, is to be fundamentally sane. If you
find that leading an ordinary life is a sane thing to do, that

48 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism,

is dharma. At the same time you could find that leading the
life of an ascetic yogi, as described in the texts, could become
an expression of insanity. It depends upon the individual.
It is a question of what is sane for you, the really solid, sound,
stable approach to life. The Buddha, for example, was not a
religious fanatic, attempting to act in accordance with some
high ideal. He just dealt with people simply, openly and very
wisely. His wisdom came from transcendental common sense.
His teaching was sound and open.

The problem seems to be that peo|)le worry about a con-
flict between the religious and the profane. They find it very
difficult to reconcile so called "higher consciousness" with
practical affairs. But the categories of higher and lower, re-
ligious and profane, do not really seem relevant to a basically
sane approach to life.

Marpa was just an ordinary person, involved in living every
detail of his life. He never tried to be someone special. When
he lost his temper, he just lost it and beat people. He just did
it. He never acted or pretended. Religious fanatics, on the
other hand, are always trying to live up to some model of
how it all is supposed to be. They try to win people over by
coming on very strong and frantic, as though they were com-
pletely pure and good. But I think that attempting to prove
that you are good indicates fear of some kind. Marpa, how-
ever, had nothing to prove. He was just a very sane and
ordinary solid citizen, and a very enlightened person at the
same time. In fact, he is the father of the whole Kagyii lineage.
All the teachings we are studying and practicing spring from
him.

Q: There is a Zen expression: "At first the mountains are
mountains and streams are streams. Then the mountains are

The Guru 49

not mountains and streams are not streams. But in the end,
mountains are mountains again and streams are streams
again." Well, aren't we all in the stage where mountains are
not mountains and streams are not streams? Yet you are
emphasizing this ordinary quality. Don't we have to go
through this "not ordinary" period before we can really be
ordinary?

A: Marpa was very upset when his son was killed, and one
of his disciples said, "You used to tell us that everything is
illusion. How about the death of your son? Isn't it illusion?"
And Marpa replied, "True, but my son's death is a super-
illusion."

When we first experience true ordinariness, it is something
very extraordinarily ordinary, so much so that we would say
that mountains are not mountains any more or streams streams
any more, because we see them as so ordinary, so precise, so
"as they are." This extraordinariness derives from the ex-
perience of discovery. But eventually this super-ordinariness,
this precision, becomes an everyday event, something we live
with all the time, truly ordinary, and we are back where we
started: the mountains are mountains and streams are streams.
Then we can relax.

Q: How do you take off your suit of armor? How do you
open yourself?

A: It is not a question of how you do it. There is no ritual or
ceremony or formula for opening. The first obstacle is the
question itself: "How?" If you don't question yourself, don't
watch yourself, then you just do it. We do not consider how we
are going to vomit; we just vomit. There is no time to think
about it; it just happens. If we are very tense, then we will
have tremendous pain and will not really be able to vomit

50 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

properly. We will try to swallow it back, try to struggle with
our illness. We have to learn to relax when we are sick.

Q: When the situations of life start to become your guru,
does it matter what form the situation takes? Does it matter
what situation you find yourself in?

A: You have no choice at all. Whatever happens is an ex-
pression of the guru. The situation could be painful or inspir-
ing, but both pain and pleasure are one in this openness of
seeing the situation as guru.

Initiation

Most of the people who have come to study with me have done
so because they have heard of me personally, of my reputa-
tion as a meditation teacher and Tibetan lama. But how many
people would have come had we first bumped into each other
on the road or met in a restaurant? Very few people would be
inspired to study Buddhism and meditation by such a meet-
ing. Rather people seem to be inspired by the fact that I am a
meditation teacher from exotic Tibet, the eleventh reincarna-
tion of the Trungpa Tulku.

So people come and seek initiation from me, initiation into
the Buddhist teachings and the sangha, the community of medi-
tators on the path. But what does this initiation really mean?
There is a long and great tradition of handing down the wis-
dom of the Buddhist lineage from one generation of medita-
tors to the next, and this transmission is connected with initia-
tion. But what is it all about?

It really seems worthwhile to be cynical in this regard.
People would like to receive initiation: they would like to join
the club, receive a title, obtain wisdom. Personally, I do not
wish to play on people's weakness, their desire to get some-
thing extraordinary. Some people will buy a painting by
Picasso simply because of the artist's name. They will pay

54 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

thousands of dollars without considering whether what they
are buying is worthwhile as art. They are buying the paint-
ing's credentials, the name, accepting reputation and rumor
as their guarantee of artistic merit. There is no hard intelli-
gence in such an act.

Or someone might join a club, be initiated into a particular
organization because he feels starved, worthless. The group is
fat and wealthy and he wants someone to feed him. He gets fed
and becomes fat as he expected, but then what? Who is de-
ceiving whom? Is the teacher or guru deceiving himself, ex-
panding his ego? "I have such a large flock of followers who
have been initiated." Or is he deceiving his students, leading
them to believe that they have become wiser, more spiritual,
simply because they have committed themselves to his organi-
zation and have been labeled monks, yogis, whatever titles
they may have received? There are so many different titles to
receive. Do these names, credentials bring us any real benefit?
Do they really? Half an hour's ceremony does not bring us to
the next stage of enlightenment; let's face facts. I personally
have tremendous devotion to and faith in the Buddhist lineage
and the power of the teachings, but not in a simple-minded
way.

We must approach spirituality with a hard kind of intelli-
gence. If we go to hear a teacher speak, we should not allow
ourselves to be carried away by his reputation and charisma,
but we should properly experience each word of his lecture
or each aspect of the meditation technique being taught. We
must make a clear and intelligent relationship with the teach-
ings and the man teaching. Such intelligence has nothing to
do with emotionalism or romanticizing the guru. It has noth-
ing to do with gullibly accepting impressive credentials, nor
is it a matter of joining a club that we might be enriched.

Initiation 55

It is not a matter of finding a wise guru from whom we can
buy or steal wisdom. True initiation involves dealing honestly
and straight forwardly with our spiritual friend and ourselves.
So we have to make some effort to expose ourselves and our
self-deceptions. We have to surrender and expose the raw and
rugged quality of our ego.

The Sanskrit equivalent for "initiation" is abhisheka which
means "sprinkle," "pour," "annointment." And if there is
])ouring, there must be a vessel into which the pouring can fall.
If we really commit ourselves by opening to our spiritual
friend properly, completely, becoming a vessel into which his
communication may fall, then he will also open and initiation
will occur. This is the meaning of abhisheka or "the meeting
of the two minds" of teacher and student.

Such opening does not involve ingratiation, trying to please
or impress our s))iritual friend. The situation is similar to that
in which a doctor, realizing that there is something wrong with
you, takes you from your home, by force if necessary, and
operates on your body without an anaesthetic. You might find
this kind of treatment a bit too violent and painful, but then
you begin to realize how much real communication — being in
touch with life — costs.

Monetary donations to a spiritual cause, contributions of
physical labor, involvement with a particular guru, none of
these necessarily mean that we have actually committed our-
selves to openness. More likely these kinds of commitment
are simply ways of proving that we have joined the side of
"right." The guru seems to be a wise person. He knows what
he is doing and we would like to be on his side, the safe side,
the good side, in order to secure our well-being and success.
But once we have attached ourselves to his side, the side of
sanity, the side of stability, the side of wisdom, then to our

56 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

surprise we discover that we have not succeeded in securing
ourselves at all, because we have only committed our facade,
our face, our suit of armor. We have not totally committed
ourselves.

Then we are forced to open from behind. To our horror we
find that there is no place to run. We are discovered in the act
of hiding behind a facade, exposed on all sides; the padding
and armor that we have worn are all stripped away. There is
no longer any place to hide. Shocking! Everything is revealed,
our petty pretense and egotism. At this point we might realize
that our clumsy attempt to wear a mask has all along been
pointless.

Still we attempt to rationalize this painful situation, trying
to find some way to protect ourselves, some way to explain our
predicament to ego's satisfaction. We look at it this way and
that way, and our mind is extremely busy. Ego is very profes-
sional, overwhelmingly efficient in its way. When we think that
we are working on the forward-moving process of attempting
to empty ourselves out, we find ourselves going backwards,
trying to secure ourselves, filling ourselves up. And this con-
fusion continues and intensifies until we finally discover that
we are totally lost, that we have lost our ground, that there is
no starting point or middle or end because our mind has been
so overwhelmed by our own defense mechanisms. So the only
alternative seems to be to just give in and let be. Our clever
ideas and smart solutions do us no good, because we have been
overwhelmed with too many ideas; we do not know which
ideas to choose, which ideas will provide us with the best way
to work on ourselves. Our mind is overcrowded with extra-
ordinary, intelligent, logical, scientific and cunning sugges-
tions. But somehow there are too many and we do not know
which suggestion to take.

Initiation

57

So at last we might really give up all these complications
and just allow some space, just give in. This is the moment
when abhisheka — sprinkling and pouring — really takes place,
because we are open and are really giving up the whole at-
tempt to do anything, giving up all the busyness and over-
crowding. Finally we have been forced to really stop ])roperly,
which is quite a rare occurrence for us.

We have so many different defense mechanisms fashioned
out of the knowledge we have received, the reading we have
done, the experiences we have undergone, the dreams we have
dreamed. But finally we begin to question what spirituality
means really. Is it simply a matter of attempting to be religi-
ous, pious and good? Or is it trying to know more than other
people, trying to learn more about the significance of life?
What does it really mean, spirituality? The familiar theories
of our family church and its doctrine are always available, but
somehow these are not the answers we seek; they are a bit too
ineffective, not applicable. So we fall away from the doctrines
and dogmas of the religion we were born to.

We might decide that spirituality is something very exciting
and colorful. It is a matter of ex])loring ourselves in the tradi-
tion of some exotic and different sect or religion. We adopt
another kind of spirituality, behaving in a certain way, at-
tempting to change our tone of voice and eating habits and our
behavior in general. But after a while such self-conscious at-
tempts to be spiritual begin to feel too clumsy and obvious,
too familiar. We intend these patterns of behavior to become
habitual, second nature, but somehow they do not comj)letely
become a part of us. Much as we would like these "enlight-
ened" behavior patterns to become a natural part of our make-
up, neurosis is still present in our minds. We begin to wonder:
"If I have been acting in accordance with the sacred scriptures

58 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

of the such and such tradition, how could this happen? This
must be due to my confusion, of course. But what do I do next?"
Confusion still continues in spite of our faithful adherence to
the scriptures. Neuroticism and discontent go on. Nothing
really clicks ; we have not connected with the teachings.

At this point we really need "the meeting of the two minds."
Without abhisheka our attempts to achieve spirituality will
result in no more than a huge spiritual collection rather than
real surrender. We have been collecting different behavior pat-
terns, different manners of speech, dress, thought, whole differ-
ent ways of acting. And all of it is merely a collection we are
attempting to impose upon ourselves.

Abhisheka, true initiation, is born out of surrender. We
open ourselves to the situation as it is, and then we make real
communication with the teacher. In any event, the guru is al-
ready there with us in a state of openness; and if we open our-
selves, are willing to give up our collections, then initiation
takes place. There is no "sacred" ceremony necessary. In fact,
considering initiation "sacred" is probably seduction by what
Buddhists refer to as "the daughters of Mara." Mara repre-
sents the neurotic tendency of mind, the unbalanced state of
being, and he sends his daughters to seduce us. When the
daughters of Mara take part in initiation in which the meet-
ing of the two minds is actually taking place, they will say,
"You feel peaceful? That is because you are receiving spiri-
tual instruction, because this is a spiritual thing that is hap-
pening to you, it is sacred." They have very sweet voices and
bring a lovely, beautiful message, and they seduce us into
thinking that this communication, this "meeting of the two
minds" is a "big deal." Then we begin to give birth to further
samsaric patterns of mind. It is similar to the Christian idea
of biting the apple; it is temptation. When we regard abhisheka

Initiation 59

as sacred, then the precision and sharpness immediately begin
to fall away because we have begun to evaluate. We hear the
voices of the daughters of Mara congratulating us that we have
managed to do such a holy thing. They are dancing around us
and playing music in the pretense of honoring us on this cere-
monial occasion.

The meeting of the two minds really takes place very natur-
ally. Both the instructor and the student meet in a state of
openness in which they both realize that openness is the most
insignificant thing in the whole world. It is completely insig-
nificant, truly ordinary, absolutely nothing. When we are able
to see ourselves and the world in this way, then transmission
is directly taking place. In the Tibetan tradition this way of
seeing things is called "ordinary mind," thamal-gyi-shepa.
It is the most insignificant thing of all, complete openness, the
absence of any kind of collection or evaluation. We could say
that such insignificance is very significant, that such ordinari-
ness is truly extraordinary. But this would just be further
seduction by the daughters of Mara. Eventually we must give
up trying to be something special.

Q: It seems that I cannot get away from trying to secure my-
self. What should! do?

A: You want so much to be secure that the idea of trying not
to secure yourself has become a game, a big joke, and a way
of securing yourself. You are so concerned about watching
yourself and watching yourself watching, and watching your-
self watching yourself watching. It goes on and on and on. It is
quite a common phenomenon.

What is really needed is for you to stop caring altogether, to
comj)letely drop the whole concern. The overlapping compli-
cations, building an extremely fine lie detector and a detector

60 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

for the lie detector as well, such complicated structures have
to be cleared away. You try to secure yourself and, having
achieved security, then you also attempt to secure that as well.
Such fortifications could extend to an infinite empire. You
might just own a tiny little castle, but the scope of your pro-
tection could extend to cover the entire earth. If you really
want to secure yourself completely, there is literally no limit
to the efforts you can make.

So it is necessary to drop altogether the idea of security and
see the irony of your attempts to secure yourself, the irony of
your overlapping structure of self-protection. You have to give
up the watcher of the watcher of the watcher. In order to do
this, one has to drop the first watcher, the intention of protec-
tion itself.

Q: I don't know what nationality to bring up, but if we were
Indians, for instance, you wouldn't speak to us this way, would
you? I mean, it's because we are Americans and are so much
into doing things that you have to speak to us this way. If we
were given to doing nothing, just sitting around, you wouldn't
speak to us like this.

A: That is a very interesting point. I think the style in which
the teachings are presented depends upon how much the audi-
ence is involved with the speed of materialism. America has
achieved an extremely sophisticated level of physical material-
ism. However, the potential for being involved in this kind of
speed is not limited to Americans, it is universal, world-wide.
If India reaches the stages of economic development that
America has attained, where people have achieved and have
become disillusioned with physical materialism, then they will
be coming to listen to such a lecture. But at this time I do not
think there would be an audience for this kind of lecture any-

Initiation 61

where other than in the West, because people elsewhere are not
yet tired enough of the speed of physical materialism. They
are still saving money to buy bicycles on the way to auto-
mobiles.

Self-Deception

Self-deception is a constant problem as we progress along a
spiritual path. Ego is always trying to achieve spirituality. It
is rather like wanting to witness your own funeral. For in-
stance, in the beginning we might approach our spiritual
friend hoping to get something wonderful from him. This ap-
proach is called "hunting the guru." Traditionally, it is com-
pared to hunting the musk deer. The hunter stalks the deer,
kills it, and removes the musk. We could take this approach to
the guru and spirituality, but it would be self-deception. It
would have nothing to do with real opening or surrender.

Or we might falsely assume that initiation means transplan-
tation, transplanting the spiritual power of the teachings from
the guru's heart into our own. This mentality regards the
teachings as something foreign to us. It is similar to the idea
of transplanting a real heart or, for that matter, a head. A
foreign element is transplanted into us from outside our body.
We might tend to appraise our potential transplant. Perhaps
our old head is not suitable, perhaps it should be thrown into
the rubbish heap. We deserve a better head, a fresh one, a
more intelligent one with lots of brains. We are so concerned
with what we are going to get out of our potential operation
that we have forgotten the doctor who is going to perform it.

64 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

Have we stopped to make a relationship with our physician?
Is he competent? Is the head we have chosen really suitable?
Might not our doctor have something to say about our choice
of heads? Perhaps our body would reject that head. We are so
concerned with what we think we are going to get, that we
ignore what is really happening, our relationship with our
doctor, our illness, what this new head really is.

This approach to the process of initiation is very romantic
and not at all valid. So we need someone personally concerned
with us as we really are, we need a person to play the part of
mirror. Whenever we are involved with any kind of self-decep-
tion, it is necessary that the whole process be revealed, opened.
Any grasping attitude must be exposed.

Real initiation takes place in terms of "the meeting of the
two minds." It is a matter of being what you really are and of
relating to the spiritual friend as he or she is. This is the true
situation in which initiation might occur, because the idea of
having an operation and fundamentally changing yourself is
completely unrealistic. No one can really change your per-
sonality absolutely. No one can turn you completely upside
down and inside out. The existing material, that which is al-
ready there, must be used. You must accept yourself as you
are, instead of as you would like to be, which means giving
up self-deception and wishful thinking. Your whole make-up
and personality characteristics must be recognized, accepted,
and then you might find some inspiration.

At this point, if you express a willingness to work with your
physician by committing yourself into the hospital, then the
doctor for his part will make available a room and whatever
else is needed. So both sides would be creating a situation of
open communication, which is the fundamental meaning of
"the meeting of the two minds." This is the real way of uniting

Self- Deception 65

the blessing or adhishthana, the spiritual essence of the guru,
and your own spiritual essence. The external teacher, the
guru, opens himself and, because you also are open, because
you are "awake," there is the meeting of two elements which
are identical. This is the true meaning of abhisheka, initiation.
It is not a matter of joining a club, of becoming one of the
flock, a sheep with your owner's initials branded on your
behind.

So now we can examine what comes after abhisheka. Hav-
ing experienced the meeting of the two minds, we have estab-
lished real communication with our spiritual friend. We have
not only opened ourselves, but we have also experienced a
flash of insight, an instant understanding of part of the teach-
ings. The teacher created the situation, we experienced this
flash, and everything seems to be fine.

At first we are very excited, everything is beautiful. We
might find that for several days we feel very "high" and
excited. It seems we have already achieved the level of
Buddhahood. No mundane concerns bother us at all, every-
thing goes very smoothly, instantaneous meditation occurs all
the time. It is a continuous experience of our moment of open-
ness with the guru. This is quite common. At this point many
people might feel that they do not need to work further with
their spiritual friend, and possibly they might leave, go away.
I heard many stories of this happening in the East: certain stu-
dents met their teacher and received an instant enlightenment
experience and then left. They tried to preserve that experi-
ence, but as time went on it became just a memory, words and
ideas which they repeated to themselves.

Quite possibly your first reaction after such an experience
would be to write it down in your diary, explaining in words
everything that happened. You would attempt to anchor your-

66 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

self to the experience through your writings and memoirs, by
discussing it with people, or by talking to people who witnessed
you having the experience.

Or a person might have gone to the East and had this sort
of experience and then come back to the West. His friends
might find him tremendously changed. He might look calmer,
quieter, wiser. Many people might ask him for help and advice
with their personal problems, might ask for his opinion of their
experience of spirituality. In the beginning, his way of helping
other people would be genuine, relating their problems to his
own experience in the East, telling peoj)le beautiful and gen-
uine stories of what happened to him. It would be very inspir-
ing for him.

But at some stage in this sort of situation something tends
to go wrong. The memory of that sudden flash of insight that a
person has experienced loses its intensity. It does not last be-
cause he regards it as being external to himself. He feels that
he has had a sudden experience of the awakened state of mind
and that it belongs to the category of holiness, spiritual experi-
ence. He valued the experience highly and then communicated
it to the ordinary and familiar world of his homeland, to his
enemies and friends, parents and relatives, to all those people
and attachments which he now feels he has transcended and
overcome. But now the experience is no longer with him. There
is just the memory. And yet, having })roclaimed his experience
and knowledge to other people, he obviously cannot go back
and say what he said previously was false. He could not do
that at all; it would be too humiliating. Moreover, he still has
faith in the experience, that something profound really hap-
pened. But unfortunately the experience is no longer present at
this very moment, because he used and evaluated it.

Self-Deception 67

Speaking generally what ha})pens is that, once we have
actually opened, "flashed," in the second moment we realize
that we are open and the idea of evaluation suddenly appears.
"Wow, fantastic, I have to catch that, I have to capture and
keep it because it is a very rare and valuable experience." So
we try to hold onto the experience and the problems start there,
from regarding the real experience of openness as something
valuable. As soon as we try to capture the experience, a whole
series of chain reactions sets in.

If we regard something as valuable and extraordinary, then
it becomes quite se})arate from us. For instance, we do not re-
gard our eyes, body, hands or head as valuable, because we
know they are a part of us. Of course, if we lost them, any of
them, our automatic reaction would be that we had lost such
a valuable thing — "I have lost my head, I have lost my arm, it
is impossible to replace!" Then we realize that it is a valuable
thing. When something is removed from us, we have the op-
portunity to realize that it is valuable. But when we have it
with us all the time, when it is part of our entire make-up, then
we cannot value it particularly; it is just there. The evaluation
comes from the fear of being separated, which is just what
keeps us separated. We consider any sudden inspiration to be
extraordinarily imjjortant, because we are afraid of losing it.
That very point, that very moment, is when self-deception
comes in. In other words, we lost faith in the experience of
openness and its relationship to us.

Somehow we lost the unity of openness and what we are.
Openness became a separate thing, and then we began to play
games. It is obvious that we cannot say that we have lost the
openness. "I used to have it, but I have lost it." We cannot say
that, because that will destroy our status as an accomplished

68 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

person. So the part of self-deception is to retell the stories. We
would rather tell stories than actually experience openness,
because stories are very vivid and enjoyable. "When I was
with my guru, such and such happened; he said such and such
things and opened me in such and such a way, etc., etc." So
self-deception, in this case, means trying to recreate a past
experience again and again, instead of actually having the
experience in the present moment. In order to have the experi-
ence now, one would have to give up the evaluation of how
wonderful the flash was, because it is this memory which keeps
it distant. If we had the experience continuously it would seem
quite ordinary, and it is this ordinariness that we cannot ac-
cept. "If only I could have that wonderful experience of open-
ness again!" So we keep ourselves busy not having it, remem-
bering it. This is self-deception's game.

Self-deception needs the idea of evaluation and a very long
memory. Thinking back, we feel nostalgic, getting a kick from
our memories, but we do not know where we are at this very
moment. We remember the "good times," the "good old days."
We do not allow our depression to emerge at all, we do not
want to accept the suspicion that we are out of touch with
something. Whenever, the possibility of depression arises and
the feeling of loss is about to occur, the defensive nature of ego
immediately brings to mind memories and words we have
heard in the past in order to comfort us. Thus ego is continu-
ally looking for inspiration which has no root in the present;
it is a continual running back. This is the more complicated
action of self-deception: one does not allow depression to come
into being at all. "Since I have received such great blessings
and been fortunate enough to have these wonderful spiritual
experiences, how can I possibly say that I am depressed? Im-
possible, there is no room for depression."

Self-Deceptioii 69

There is the story of the great Tibetan teacher, Marpa.
When Marpa first met his own teacher, Naropa, Naropa cre-
ated an altar which he said was the embodiment of the wisdom
of a particular heruka. Both the shrine and Naropa contained
tremendous spiritual energy and power, and Naropa asked
Marpa to which one he would prostrate in order to experience
the sudden realization of enlightenment. Marpa, being a
scholar, considered that the guru lives in the flesh, an ordinary
human body, while his creation, the altar, is a pure body of
wisdom, having nothing to do with human imperfection. So
Marpa prostrated to the shrine. And then Naropa said, "I am
afraid your inspiration is going to fade. You have made the
wrong choice. This shrine is my creation, and without me the
shrine would not be here at all. The issue of human body
versus wisdom body is irrelevant. The great display of the
mandala was merely my creation."

This story illustrates the principle of dream, hope, wish, as
self-deception. As long as you regard yourself or any part of
your experience as the "dream come true," then you are in-
volved in self-deception. Self-deception seems always to de-
pend upon the dream world, because you would like to see
what you have not yet seen, rather that what you are now see-
ing. You will not accept that whatever is here now is what is,
nor are you willing to go on with the situation as it is. Thus,
self-deception always manifests itself in terms of trying to
create or recreate a dream world, the nostalgia of the dream
experience. And the opposite of self-deception is just working
with the facts of life.

If one searches for any kind of bliss or joy, the realization
of one's imagination and dream, then, equally, one is going
to suffer failure and depression. This is the whole point: a fear
of separation, the hope of attaining union, these are not just

70 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

manifestations of or the actions of ego or self-deception, as if
ego were somehow a real thing which performed certain ac-
tions. Ego is the actions, the mental events. Ego is the fear of
losing openness, the fear of losing the egoless state. This is the
meaning of self-deception, in this case — ego crying that it has
lost the egoless state, its dream of attainment. Fear, hope, loss,
gain — these are the on-going action of the dream of ego, the
self-perpetuating, self-maintaining structure which is self-
deception.

So the real experience, beyond the dream world, is the
beauty and color and excitement of the real experience of
now in everyday life. When we face things as they are, we
give up the hope of something better. There will be no magic,
because we cannot tell ourselves to get out of our depression.
Depression and ignorance, the emotions, whatever we experi-
ence, are all real and contain tremendous truth. If we really
want to learn and see the experience of truth, we have to be
where we are. The whole thing is just a matter of being a grain
of sand.

Q: Would you talk some more about the mechanics of this
force of despair? I can understand why despair might occur,
but why does bliss occur?

A: It is possible in the beginning to force oneself into the
experience of bliss. It is a kind of self-hypnosis, in that we
refuse to see the background of what we are. We focus only
upon the immediate experience of bliss. We ignore the entire
basic ground, where we really are at, so to speak, and we work
ourselves up to an experience of tremendous joy. The trouble
is, this kind of experience is based purely upon watching one-
self. It is a completely dualistic approach. We would like to

Self-Deception 71

experience something, and by working very hard we do actu-
ally achieve it. However, once we come down from our "high,"
once we realize that we are still here, like a black rock stand-
ing in the middle of an ocean of waves, then depression sets in.
We would like to get drunk, intoxicated, absorbed into the
entire universe, but somehow it does not happen. We are still
here, which is always the first thing to bring us down. Later all
the other games of self-deception, of trying to feed oneself fur-
ther, begin because one is trying to protect oneself completely.
It is the "watcher" principle.

Q: You speak of people experiencing something and then
grasping it intellectually, labeling it saying, "That's fan-
tastic." This seems to be an almost automatic reaction. Could
you go through the ways in which people begin to get away
from doing this? It seems to me that the more you try to stop
evaluating, the more you are evaluating.

A: Well, once you realize that you are actually doing this
and are not getting anything from it, then I think you begin
to find your way out. One begins to see that the whole process
is part of a huge game which is not really profitable, because
you are continuously building rather than coming to an under-
standing of anything. There is no magic or trick involved. The
only thing to do is to quite painfully unmask.

Perhaps you will have to build and build until you realize
the futility of attempting to achieve spirituality. Your entire
mind might become completely overcrowded with your
struggle. In fact, you might not know whether you are coming
or going, to the point where you become completely ex-
hausted. Then you might learn a very useful lesson: to give up
the whole thing, to be nothing. You might even experience a

72 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

yearning to be nothing. There seem to be two solutions: either
to simply unmask, or else to build and build, strive and strive,
until you reach a crescendo and then drop the whole thing.

Q: What happens when one says, "Wow, I've made it." That
doesn't blow the whole trip, does it?

A: Not necessarily. But then, what happens next? Do you
want to repeat your experience again and again, rather than
working with the present situation of what is? One could ex-
perience tremendous joy in the first flash of openness, which is
quite beautiful.' But what comes afterwards is important:
whether one is working to grasp and recreate that experience
or whether one is letting be, allowing that experience to be
just one experience, not attempting to recreate the first flash.

Q: You are ambitious, building all the time, and the more
you think about it, the worse it gets. So you try to just run away
from the whole thing, try not to think about it, try to lose your-
self in all sorts of escapes. What does this mean and how can
one get over the fact that, the more one thinks about enlighten-
ment and tries to find out about it, the worse things become and
the more conceptualizations accumulate? What do you do?
A: That is very obvious. You drop searching for anything
altogether, drop trying to discover anything, trying to prove
yourself.

Q: But sometimes one might have an active feeling of run-
ning away, and that is not the same thing as not doing anything
at all.

A: Once you try to run away, you find that not only are you
being chased from behind, but there are also people coming
towards you from the front as well. Eventually there is no

Self-Deception 73

room to run. You are completely trapped. Then the only thing
to do is really, simply to give in.

Q : What does that mean?

A: Well, one has to experience it. It means to stop trying to
go anywhere, both in terms of getting away from and of run-
ning to, because both are the same thing.

Q: Is self-remembering or observing oneself incongruent
with giving in and being here?

A: Self- remembering is quite a dangerous technique, ac-
tually. It could involve watching yourself and your actions
like a hungry cat watching mice, or else it could be an intelli-
gent gesture of being where you are. The whole point is that,
if you have any idea of relationship — I am experiencing this,
I am doing this — then "I" and "this" are very strong person-
alities, equally. Somehow there will be a conflict between "I"
and "this." It is rather like saying that "this" is the mother
and "I" the father. With two such polar extremes involved
you are bound to give birth to something. So the whole idea is
to let "this" not be there, and then "I" will not be there. Or
else, "I" is not there, therefore "this" is not there. It is not a
matter of telling it to yourself, but of feeling it, a real experi-
ence. You must take away the watcher, the observer of the two
extremes. Once the watcher is removed, then the whole struc-
ture falls apart. The dichotomy remains in existence only so
long as there is an observer to keep the whole picture together.
You must remove the watcher and the very complicated bu-
reaucracy he creates to insure that nothing is missed by cen-
tral headquarters. Once we take away the watcher, there is a
tremendous amount of space, because he and his bureaucracy
take up so much room. If we eliminate the filter of "I" and

74 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

"other," then the space becomes sharp and precise and intelli-
gent. Space contains the tremendous jsrecision of being able to
work with the situations in it. One does not really need the
"watcher" or "observer" at all.

Q: Does the watcher exist because you want to be living at
what seems a higher level, whereas if you just let go, perhaps
you would be here?

A: Yes, that is true. When the watcher disappears, the notion
of higher and lower levels does not apply, so there is no longer
any inclination to struggle, attempting to get higher. Then you
just are where you are.

Q: Can you remove the watcher by force? Wouldn't that be
the game of evaluation again?

A: You do not have to regard the watcher as a villain. Once
you begin to understand that the purpose of meditation is not
to get higher but to be present, here, then the watcher is not
efficient enough to perform that function, and it automatically
falls away. The basic quality of the watcher is to try to be ex-
tremely efficient and active. But total awareness is something
you already have, so ambitious or so called "efficient" attempts
to be aware are self-defeating. As the watcher begins to realize
that it is irrelevant, it falls away.

Q: Can there be awareness without a watcher?
A: Yes, because the watcher is only paranoia. You could
have complete openness, a panoramic situation, without hav-
ing to discriminate between two parties, "I" and "other."

Q : Would that awareness involve feelings of bliss?

A: I do not think so, because bliss is a very individual ex-

Self-Decejstion 75

perience. You are separate and you are experiencing your
bliss. When the watcher is gone, there is no evaluation of the
experience as being pleasant or painful. When you have pano-
ramic awareness without the evaluation of the watcher, then
the bliss becomes irrelevant, by the very fact that there is no
one experiencing it.

The Hard Way

Inasmuch as no one is going to save us, to the extent that no
one is going magically to enlighten us, the path we are dis-
cussing is called the "hard way." This path does not conform
to our expectation that involvement with the Buddhist teach-
ing will be gentle, peaceful, pleasant, compassionate. It is the
hard way, a simple meeting of two minds: if you open your
mind, if you are willing to meet, then the teacher opens his,
mind as well. It is not a question of magic; the condition of
openness is a mutual creation.

Generally, when we speak of freedom or liberation or spir-
itual understanding, we think that to attain these things we
need do nothing at all, that someone else will take care of us.
"You are all right, don't worry, don't cry, you're going to be
all right. I'll take care of you." We tend to think that all we
have to do is make a commitment to the organization, pay our
initiation fee, sign the register and then follow the instruc-
tions given us. "I am firmly convinced that your organization
is valid, it answers all my questions. You may program me
in any way. If you want to put me into difficult situations, do
so. I leave everything to you." This attitude supplies the com-
fort of having to do nothing but follow orders. Everything is
left to the other person, to instruct you and relieve you of

78 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

your shortcomings. But to our surprise things do not work
that way. The idea that we do not have to do anything on our
own is extremely wishful thinking.

It takes tremendous effort to work one's way through the
difficulties of the path and actually get into the situations of
life thoroughly and properly. So the whole point of the hard
way seems to be that some individual effort must be made by
the student to acknowledge himself, to go through the process
of unmasking. One must be willing to stand alone, which is
difficult.

This is not to say that the point of the hard way is that we
must be heroic. The attitude of "heroism" is based upon the
assumption that we are bad, impure, that we are not worthy,
are not ready for spiritual understanding. We must reform
ourselves, be different from what we are. For instance, if we
are middle class Americans, we must give up our jobs or drop
out of college, move out of our suburban homes, let our hair
grow, perhaps try drugs. If we are hippies, we must give up
drugs, cut our hair short, throw away our torn jeans. We
think that we are special, heroic, that we are turning away
from temptation. We become vegetarians and we become this
and that. There are so many things to become. We think our
path is spiritual because it is literally against the flow of what
we used to be, but it is merely the way of false heroism, and
the only one who is heroic in this way is ego.

We can carry this sort of false heroism to great extremes,
getting ourselves into completely austere situations. If the
teaching with which we are engaged recommends standing on
our heads for twenty-four hours a day, we do it. We purify
ourselves, perform austerities, and we feel extremely cleansed,
reformed, virtuous. Perhaps there seems to be nothing wrong
with it at the time.

The Hard Way 79

We might attempt to imitate certain spiritual paths, such
as the American Indian path or the Hindu path or the Jap-
anese Zen Buddhist path. We might abandon our suits and
collars and ties, our belts and trousers and shoes in an attempt
to follow their example. Or we may decide to go to northern
India in order to join the Tibetans. We might wear Tibetan
clothing and adopt Tibetan customs. This will seem to be the
"hard way," because there will always be obstacles and temp-
tations to distract us from our purpose.

Sitting in a Hindu ashram, we have not eaten chocolate for
six or seven months, so we dream of chocolate, or other dishes
that we like. Perhaps we are nostalgic on Christmas or New
Year's Day. But still we think we have found the path of
discipline. We have struggled through the difficulties of this
path and have become quite competent, masters of discipline
of some sort. We expect the magic and wisdom of our train-
ing and practice to bring us into the right state of mind. Some-
times we think we have achieved our goal. Perhaps we are
completely "high" or absorbed for a period of six or seven
months. Later our ecstasy disappears. And so it goes, on and
on, on and off. How are we going to deal with this situation?
We may be able to stay "high" or blissful for a very long
time, but then we have to come back or come down or return
to normal.

I am not saying that foreign or disciplinary traditions are
not apj)licable to the spiritual path. Rather, I am saying that
we have the notion that there must be some kind of medicine
or magic potion to help us attain the right state of mind. This
seems to be coming at the problem backwards. We hope that
by manipulating matter, the physical world, we can achieve
wisdom and understanding. We may even exj)ect expert sci-
entists to do it for us. They might put us into a hospital.

80 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

administer the correct drugs and lift us into a high state of
consciousness. But I think, unfortunately, that this is impos-
sible, we cannot escape what we are, we carry it with us all
the time.

So the point we come back to is that some kind of j-eal gift
or sacrifice is needed if we are to open ourselves completely.
This gift may take any form. But in order for it to be mean-
ingful, it must entail giving up our hope of getting something
in return. It does not matter how many titles we have, nor how
many suits of exotic clothes we have worn through, nor how
many philosophies, commitments and sacramental ceremonies
we have participated in. We must give up our ambition to get
something in return for our gift. That is the really hard way.

We may have had a wonderful time touring around Japan.
We may have enjoyed Japanese culture, beautiful Zen temples,
magnificent works of art. And not only did we find these ex-
periences beautiful, but they said something to us as well. This
culture is the creation of a whole lifestyle completely different
from that of the Western world, and these creations spoke to
us. But to what extent does the exquisiteness of culture and
images, the beauty of the external forms really shake us, deal
with us? We do not know. We merely want to savor our beau-
tiful memories. We do not want to question our experiences
too closely. It is a sensitive area.

Or perhaps a certain guru has initiated us in a very moving,
extremely meaningful ceremony. That ceremony was real and
direct and beautiful, but how much of the experience are we
willing to question? It is private, too sensitive to question. We
would rather hoard and preserve the flavor and beauty of the
experience so that, when bad times come, when we are de-
pressed and down, we can bring that memory to mind in order
to comfort ourselves, to tell ourselves that we have actually

The Hard Way 81

done something worthwhile, that, yes, we are on the path. This
does not seem to be the hard way at all.

On the contrary, it would seem that we have been collecting
rather than giving. If we reconsider our spiritual shopping,
can we remember an occasion when we gave something com-
pletely and properly, opened ourselves and gave everything?
Have we ever unmasked, stripping out of our suit of armor
and our shirt and skin and flesh and veins, right down to the
heart? Have we really experienced the process of stripping
and opening and giving? That is the fundamental question.
We must really surrender, give something, give something up
in a very painful way. We must begin to dismantle the basic
structure of this ego we have managed to create. The process
of dismantling, undoing, opening, giving up, is the real learn-
ing process. How much of this ingrown toenail situation have
we decided to give up? Most likely, we have not managed to
give up anything at all. We have only collected, built, adding
layer upon layer. So the prospect of the hard way is very
threatening.

The problem is that we tend to seek an easy and painless
answer. But this kind of solution does not apply to the spirit-
ual path, which many of us should not have begun at all. Once
we commit ourselves to the spiritual path, it is very painful
and we are in for it. We have committed ourselves to the pain
of exposing ourselves, of taking off our clothes, our skin,
nerves, heart, brains, until we are exposed to the universe.
Nothing will be left. It will be terrible, excruciating, but that
is the way it is.

Somehow we find ourselves in the company of a strange
doctor. He is going to operate on us, but he is not going to
use an anaesthetic because he really wants to communicate
with our illness. He is not going to allow us to put on our

82 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

facade of spirituality, psychological sophistication, false psy-
chological illness or any other disguise. We wish we had never
met him. We wish we understood how to anaesthetize our-
selves. But now we are in for it. There is no way out. Not
because he is so powerful. We could tell him goodbye in a
minute and leave. But we have exposed so much to this physi-
cian and, if we have to do it all over again, it will be very
painful. We do not want to have to do it again. So now we have
to go all the way.

Being with this doctor is extremely uncomfortable for us
because we are continually trying to con him, although we
know that he sees through our games. This operation is his
only way to communicate with us, so we must accept it; we
must open ourselves to the hard way, to this operation. The
more we ask questions — "What are you going to do to me?" —
the more embarrassed we become, because we know what we
are. It is an extremely narrow path with no escape, a painful
path. We must surrender ourselves completely and communi-
cate with this physician. Moreover, we must unmask our ex-
pectations of magic on the part of the guru, that with his
magical powers he can initiate us in certain extraordinary and
painless ways. We have to give up looking for a painless op-
eration, give up hope that he will use an anaesthetic or seda-
tive so that when we wake up everything will be perfect. We
must be willing to communicate in a completely open and
direct way with our spiritual friend and with our life, without
any hidden corners. It is difficult and painful, the hard way.

Q. Is exposing yourself something that just happens, or is
there a way of doing it, a way of o])ening?
A: I think that if you are already committed to the process
of exposing yourself, then the less you try to open the more

The Hard Way 83

the process of opening becomes obvious. I would say it is an
automatic action rather than something that you have to do.
At the beginning when we discussed surrendering, I said that
once you have exposed everything to your spiritual friend,
then you do not have to do anything at all. It is a matter of
just accepting what is, which we tend to do in any case. We
often find ourselves in situations completely naked, wishing
we had clothes to cover ourselves. These embarrassing situa-
tions always come to us in life.

Q: Must we have a spiritual friend before we can expose
ourselves, or can we just open ourselves to the situations of
life?

A: I think you need someone to watch you do it, because
then it will seem more real to you. It is easy to undress in
a room with no one else around, but we find it difficult to
undress ourselves in a room full of people.

Q: So it is really exposing ourselves to ourselves?
A: Yes. But we do not see it that way. We have a strong
consciousness of the audience because we have so much aware-
ness of ourselves.

Q: I do not see why performing austerities and mastering
discipline is not the "real" hard way.

A: You can deceive yourself, thinking you are going through
the hard way, when actually you are not. It is like being in an
heroic play. The "soft way" is very much involved with the
experience of heroism, while the hard way is much more per-
sonal. Having gone through the way of heroism, you still have
the hard way to go through, which is a very shocking thing to
discover.

84 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

Q: Is it necessary to go through the heroic way first and is
it necessary to persevere in the heroic way in order to continue
on the truly hard way?

A: 1 don't think so. This is what I am trying to point out.
If you involve yourself with the heroic way, you add layers
or skins to your personality because you think you have
achieved something. Later, to your surprise, you discover that
something else is needed. One must remove the layers, the
skins.

Q: You speak of the necessity to experience excruciating
pain. Can an understanding of the unmasking process make it
unnecessary to go through the pain?

A: That is a very tricky proposition. Understanding does not
mean that you actually do it; you just understand it. We can
understand the physiological process of how someone is tor-
tured and how they experience pain, but the actual experience
would be altogether different. The philosophical or intellec-
tual understanding of pain is not enough. You must actually
feel something properly. The only way to get to the heart of
the matter is to actually experience it for yourself, but you do
not have to create painful situations. These situations will
occur with the help of a spiritual friend who is a doctor with
a sharp knife.

Q: If you are in the process of surrendering and your spir-
itual friend at that point seems to point his scalpel at you and
take away your anaesthesia, then that is an extremely terrify-
ing situation. Your spiritual friend seems to be very angry
and disgusted and you want to run. Would you explain this?
A: That is just the point. It is a matter of an operation with-
out the use of anaesthetics. You have to be willing to do it.

The Hard Way 85

If you run away, it is like a man who needs an appendectomy
running out of the operating room; his appendix might burst.

Q: But this is at a very early stage in your relationship with
your spiritual friend; you have barely been with him for five
minutes. Suddenly the roof falls in and he just leaves you to
deal with it. Perhaps he is saying, "1 am not going on this trip
with you. Five minutes have passed. Surrender it, give it all
up, deal with it yourself, and when you have cut it all loose,
then 1 will talk to you." That is how 1 have experienced it.
A: You see, it does not matter whether you are a beginning
or advanced student. It is a question of how much a person
has been with himself. If he has been with himself, then he
must know himself. It is like an ordinary illness. Suppose you
are travelling from one country to another and you feel ill and
decide to see a doctor. He can barely speak your language, but
he can feel your body and see what is wrong with you, and he
decides to take you immediately to the hospital and operate.
It depends upon how far the disease has developed. The in-
tensity of the operation depends on the maturity of the illness
in your body. You might explode completely. If you have ap-
pendicitis and the doctor waits too long, perhaps in order to
become friends with you, then your appendix is going to ex-
plode. You would not say that was a very good way of practic-
ing medicine.

Q: Why does someone take that first step on the path? What
leads him to it? Is it an accident, is it fate, karma, what is it?
A : If you expose yourself completely, then you are already
on the path. If you give yourself halfway, then you are only
part way on the path. It is going to bounce back on you. If you
give less information to your doctor, then you are going to

86 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

recover much more slowly because you have not told him your
whole case history. The more you tell your doctor, the sooner
he will be able to cure you.

Q: If the truly hard way is to expose myself, then should
I allow myself to be exposed to what I judge to be evil, know-
ing I might get hurt?

A: Opening is not a matter of martyring oneself to every
threat that comes along. You do not have to stand in front of
an oncoming train to open yourself to it. That would be the
way of heroism, the false hard way.

Whenever we confront something we regard as "evil," it
poses a threat to the self-preservation of ego. We are so busy
preserving our existence in the face of this threat that we cannot
see the thing clearly at all. To open we have to cut through
our desire to preserve our own existence. Then we can see and
deal with the situation clearly, as it is.

Q: This is not a one-shot deal, is it? I mean you can open
yourself in one context, and yet when you find yourself in
some other situation suddenly you take hold of a mask and
put it over your face, even though you really do not want to
do it. It would seem that achieving complete o[)enness is a
difficult thing.

A: The whole point is that struggle is irrelevant to opening.
Once you have stepped on the path, if you give up the struggle
itself, that takes care of the whole problem. Then there is no
longer any question of wanting or not wanting to be involved
with life-situations. The ape instinct of ego dissolves because
it is based upon secondhand information rather than upon
direct experience of what is. Struggle is ego. Once you give
up struggle, then there is no one left to conquer struggle; it

The Hard Way 87

just disappears. So you see, it is not a matter of achieving a
victory over struggle.

Q: When you feel angry, should you just express that anger
in order to open?

A: When v^^e speak of opening and surrendering as, for in-
stance, in the case of anger, it does not mean v^^e should
actually go out and hit someone on the spot. That seems to be
more a way of feeding ego rather than a way of exposing your
anger properly, seeing its real living quality. This applies to
exposing yourself in general. It is a matter of seeing the basic
quality of the situation, as it is, rather than trying to do some-
thing with it. Of course if one is completely open to the situa-
tion without any preconceptions, then one would know which
action is right and which is unskillful. If a particular course
of action would be clumsy and unskilled, then you would not
take that fork in the road; you would take the road of skillful
and creative action. You are not really involved with judgment
as such, but you choose the creative way.

Q: Is collecting things and defending disguises an inescap-
able stage?

A: We collect things and later it is painful to give them
away. It is similar to having stitches in our skin after an op-
eration. It is frightening to have them taken out, we are ap-
prehensive, we have become accustomed to a foreign element
in our system.

Q: Do you think it is possible to begin to see what is, to see
yourself as you are, without a teacher?

A: I do not think it is possible at all. You have to have a

88 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

spiritual friend in order to surrender and completely open
yourself.

Q: Is it absolutely necessary that the spiritual friend be a
living human being?

A: Yes. Any other "being" with whom you might think your-
self communicating would be imaginary.

Q: Would the teachings of Christ in themselves be a spiri-
tual friend?

A: I would not say so. That is an imaginary situation. It is
the same with any teachings; they do not have to be the teach-
ings of Christ necessarily. The problem is that we can interpret
them ourselves. That is the whole point: written teachings are
always open to the interpretation of ego.

Q: When you speak of opening and exposing yourself, it
reminds me a great deal of certain schools of psychotherapy.
What do you think is the function of the sort of things people
do in psychotherapy?

A: In most forms of psychotherapy the problem is that, if
you regard the process as "therapeutic," then you do not
really mean it but it is the therapeutic thing to do. In other
words, your therapy is a hobby. Moreover, you see your ther-
apeutic situation as being defined by your case history. Be-
cause something went wrong in your relationship with your
father and mother, you have this unhealthy tendency to . . .
Once you begin to deal with a person's whole case history, try-
ing to make it relevant to the present, the person begins to feel
that he has no escape, that his situation is hopeless, because
he cannot undo his past. He feels trapped by his past with no
way out. This kind of treatment is extremely unskilled. It is

The Hard Way 89

destructive because it hinders involvement with the creative
aspect of what is happening now, what is here, right now. But
on the other hand, if psychotherapy is presented with the
emphasis on living in the present moment, working with pres-
ent problems, not just as regards verbal expression and
thoughts alone but in terms of experiencing the actuality of
emotions and feelings, then I think that would be a very bal-
anced style. Unfortunately there are many kinds of psycho-
therapy and many psychotherapists involved with trying to
prove themselves and their own theories rather than working
with what is. In fact they find it very frightening to work with
what is.

We must simplify rather than complicate the problem with
theories of any kind. The situation of newness, this very mo-
ment, contains whole case histories and future determinations.
Everything is right here, so we do not have to go any further
than this to prove who we were or are or might be. As soon as
we try to unravel the past, then we are involved with ambition
and struggle in the present, not being able to accept the present
moment as it is. It is very cowardly. Moreover, it is unhealthy
to regard our therapist or guru as our savior. We must work
on ourselves. There is really no other alternative. The spir-
itual friend might accentuate our pain in certain circum-
stances. That is part of the physician-patient relationship. The
idea is not to regard the spiritual path as something very
luxurious and pleasurable but to see it as just facing the facts
of life.

The Open Way

It should be clear by now that in order to find the open way
we must first experience self-deception as it is, exposing our-
selves completely. We may even be hesitant to consider such
a hopeful subject as the open way, because we are so wary of
our ambition. But our caution is a sign that we are ready to
think about it. In fact, hesitation at this point could be another
form of self-deception: ignoring the teachings with the ra-
tionale of trying to be perfect and extremely careful.

The approach to the open way lies in the experience of
exposing oneself — an experience we discussed in the lecture
"Initiation" — opening oneself to life, being what you are,
presenting your positive and negative qualities to your spir-
itual friend and working your way through. Then having pre-
sented yourself, having experienced initiation, the meeting of
the two minds, you might tend to evaluate your credentials.
You have experienced such an extraordinary incident; you
were able to open, and your spiritual friend opened, and you
met both yourself and your spiritual friend in the same mo-
ment. It was exciting, beautiful.

The problem lies in the fact that we are always trying to
secure ourselves, reassure ourselves that we are all right. We
are constantly looking for something solid to hang on to. The

92 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

"miraculous" situation of the meeting of the two minds is
such a fantastic experience that it seems to confirm our ex-
pectation of miracles and magic.

So the next step on the path of self-deception is the desire
to see miracles. We have read many books describing the lives
of great yogis and swamis, saints and avatars. And all these
seem to speak of extraordinary miracles. Either someone
walked through a wall or someone turned the world upside-
down — all these miracles. You would like to prove to yourself
that such miracles do exist, because you would like to be sure
that you are on the side of the guru, the side of the doctrine,
the side of the miracles, sure that what you are doing is safe
and powerful, sensational in fact, sure that you are on the side
of the "goodies." You would like to be one of those few peo-
ple who have done something fantastic, extraordinary, super-
extraordinary, one of the people who turned the world upside-
down: "I actually thought that I was standing on the floor, but
I found myself standing on the ceiling!" The sudden flash of
the meeting with the spiritual friend, the meeting of the two
minds, is definitely real, a genuine experience, quite sensa-
tional, a miracle in fact. Perhaps we are not quite absolutely
sure, but certainly such a miracle must mean that we are on
to something, that we have found the true way at last.

Such intense attempts to prove to ourselves that what we
are doing is right indicate a very introverted state of mind;
one is very aware of oneself and the state of one's being. We
feel that we are a minority and that we are doing something
very extraordinary, that we are different from everyone else.
This sort of attempt to prove our own uniqueness is just an
attempt to validate our self-deception. "Of course I experi-
enced something extraordinary; of course I saw the miracle;
of course I had the insight; therefore I am going on." Which

Tlie Open Way 93

is a very closed-in, introverted situation. We have no time to
relate to anyone else, our friends or relatives, the outside
world. We are concerned only v^ith ourselves.

Eventually this approach becomes tedious and stale. We
begin to realize that we have been deceiving ourselves and we
begin to move closer to the genuine open way. We begin to
suspect that all our beliefs are hallucinatory, that we have
distorted our experience by evaluating it. "True, I had a flash
of instant enlightenment, but at the same time I tried to possess
it, grasp it, and it went away." We begin to discover that self-
deception does not work at all, that it is simply trying to com-
fort oneself, trying to contact oneself inwardly, trying to prove
something to oneself rather than really being open. At this
point one might begin to punish oneself saying, "If I am
trying not to deceive myself, then that is another kind of
self-deception; and if I try to avoid doing that, then that is
self-deception too. How can I possibly free myself? And if I
am trying to free myself, then that is another form of self-
deception as well," and so the chain reaction goes on and on
and on, the chain reaction of overlapping paranoia.

Having discovered self-deception, we suffer from tremen-
dous paranoia and self criticism, which is helpful. It is good
to experience the hopelessness of ambition, of trying to be
open, of trying to cheer ourselves up, because this prepares
the ground for another type of attitude toward spirituality.
The whole point we are trying to get to is — when are we going
to open, really? The action of our mind is so overlapping, an
ingrown toenail, introverted: If I do this, then that is going
to happen; if I do that, then this is going to happen. How can
I escape the self-deception? I recognize it, I see it, but how
am I going to get out of it?

I am afraid each of us has to go through this individually.

94 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

I am not giving a guided tour to enlightenment. I do not guar-
antee anything. But I am just suggesting that perhaps there is
something wrong with this approach.

Perhaps we do feel that something is wrong with this ap-
proach and we seek advice from our guru.

"I am completely convinced that this path is right for me,
of course — we do not even have to discuss that. But something
seems to be wrong. I have worked and worked on myself, and
yet I find myself involved in a chain reaction of overlapping
defeats."

"Okay then, what next?"

"Well, I am too busy to do anything else because I am so
obsessed with all this."
"Okay, relax yourself."

"What can I do? Haven't you got any suggestions?"

"I am afraid I cannot give you an immediate solution to
your problem. I have to know what is actually wrong with
you, to start with. That is what all professional ])eople would
say. If there is something wrong with your television set, you
do not immediately plug in a new tube. First you must ex-
amine the entire set. Which part does not function? Which
tubes do not work?"

"Well, there doesn't seem to be anything wrong exactly.
But the minute I try to touch on the subject it just goes berserk,
it doesn't click anymore. When I try to do something to correct
it, I get no results at all. Something seems to be fused."

"Big problem."

"You see, each time I try to work my way out, as you and
other gurus told me to do, I try and try and try but there
doesn't seem to be an end to the problem at all. Things keep
going wrong all the time. If I start practicing asanas, prana-
yama, zazen, anything, much as I try to do it correctly, still

The Open Way 95

the same familiar problems come back again and again and
again. I have great faith in these doctrines, teachings, methods
— of course I do. I love the teachers. I love the methods, I
really do. I have complete faith in them. I know that a lot of
people turn out beautifully as a result of travelling the same
path I am attempting, but what is wrong with me? Maybe I
have bad karma, maybe 1 am the black sheep of the family.
Could that be so? If it is so, then I will go on a pilgrimage on
my knees to India, I will make any sacrifice needed. I could
starve myself. I will take any vow, but I just want to get it,
really get into it. What can I do? Isn't there anything else in
your sacred books prescribing something appropriate for a
person like me? Isn't there some medicine I can take, a sacri-
fice I can perform?"

"I'm not sure. Come back later tomorrow and see me. Per-
haps we can find something."

That is what a spiritual friend might say: "See me again
tomorrow or on the weekend. Let's talk it over but don't
worry." You go again, you see him, you think that you have
some tremendous problem and that he has all the answers
worked out especially for you. And again he will ask:

"How are you? How are you getting on?"

"What do you mean? I was waiting for your answer. You
know how I am — I'm in terrible shape!"

You become very grumpy, and quite rightly in a way.
Nothing happens, as usual, and then weeks and weeks go by
as you come back again and again and again. You despair,
suspecting nothing will come of the whole thing, entertaining
the secret wish that maybe this is the time, maybe the fourth
week or the fifth week or the seventh week. Seven is very sym-
bolic, a mystic number. Time goes on: complete despair. You
are about to investigate the possibility of other solutions.

96 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

"Maybe if I go and see someone else," you think. "Perhaps
I should return home and work with my own people; this
situation is too alien to me. There seems to be no communica-
tion between him and me. He is supposed to have some kind
of communication with me, but it is very disappointing, noth-
ing happens at all." So you sit and wait. Whenever you see
him, you almost immediately know what his words to you are
going to be: "Go back and meditate," or "How are you? Have
a cup of tea." It is the same thing, again and again.

What is wrong? In fact nothing is wrong at all, absolutely
nothing. The situation is quite beautiful, as far as your spir-
itual friend is concerned. But this period of waiting on your
part, trying to get over something, is in itself wrong, because
a waiting period means so much concentration into yourself,
working inward rather than working outward. There is a ten-
dency towards centralization and there is the notion of the
"big deal" involved with your psychology, your state of mind.
That is what is wrong.

Perhaps I should tell you the story of Naropa and his
teacher Tilopa, the great Indian sage. Tilopa was a guru who
spent twelve years with his student Naropa doing practically
the same kind of thing we have been discussing here. "If you
fetch me soup from that kitchen, I will teach you, I might
teach you," Tilopa would say. Then Naropa would bring the
soup, having endured a terrible beating at the hands of the
kitchen staff and householders in order to get it. He would
arrive bloody but happy, and when he had presented the soup,
Tilopa would say, "I want another cup, go and fetch it." So
Naropa would go and fetch the soup, returning half dead. He
did this because he yearned so for the teachings. Then Tilopa
would say, "Thank you, let's go somewhere else." This sort of
incident occurred again and again until Naropa's sense of ex-

The Open Way 97

pectation had reached its crescendo. At just this point Tilopa
took off his sandal and slapped Naropa in the face. That was
the abhisheka, the highest and most profound, the greatest —
you could use many more adjectives to describe it — the great-
est abhisheka. The slapping of a sandal against a man's cheek
and suddenly there was nothing more for Naropa to work with.

But we must not get carried away with this mystical scene.
The whole point is the open path, the open way. We have thor-
oughly exammed and experienced self-deception. We have
been carrying such a heavy burden, like a tortoise carrying its
shell. We have continually attempted to seal ourselves into
this shell, trying actually to get into "somewhere" with such
aggression and speed. We must give up all our speed and
aggression, the whole demanding quality. We must develop
some compassion for ourselves, and then the open way just
begins.

At this point we should discuss the meaning of compassion,
which is the key to and the basic atmosphere of the open way.
The best and most correct way of presenting the idea of com-
passion is in terms of clarity, clarity which contains funda-
mental warmth. At this stage your meditation practice is the
act of trusting in yourself. As your practice becomes more
prominent in daily life activities, you begin to trust yourself
and have a compassionate attitude. Compassion in this sense
is not feeling sorry for someone. It is basic warmth. As much
space and clarity as there is, there is that much warmth as
well, some delightful feeling of positive things happening in
yourself constantly. Whatever you are doing, it is not regarded
as a mechanical drag in terms of self-conscious meditation, but
meditation is a delightful and spontaneous thing to do. It is
the continual act of making friends with yourself.

Then, having made friends with yourself, you cannot just

98 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

contain that friendship within you; you must have some out-
let, which is your relationship with the world. So compassion
becomes a bridge to the world outside. Trust and compassion
for oneself bring inspiration to dance with life, to communi-
cate with the energies of the world. Lacking this kind of in-
spiration and openness, the spiritual path becomes the sam-
saric path of desire. One remains trapped in the desire to
improve oneself, the desire to achieve imagined goals. If we
feel that we cannot achieve our goal, we suffer despair and
the self-torture of unfulfilled ambition. On the other hand, if
we feel that we are succeeding in achieving our goal, we might
become self-satisfied and aggressive. "I know what I'm doing,
don't touch me." We might become bloated with our knowl-
edge, like certain "experts" we meet who know their subject
thoroughly. If anyone asks questions, especially stupid or
challenging questions, they get angry rather than trying to
explain anything. "How could you say such a thing, how could
you even dream of asking such stupid questions? Don't you
see what I know?"

Or we might even succeed at some form of dualistic con-
centration practice and experience a kind of "mystical state."
In such cases we might appear quite tranquil and religious in
the conventional sense. But we would constantly have to charge
up and maintain our "mystical state" and there would be a
continual sense of appreciation, the repeated act of checking
and indulging in our achievement. This is the typical distor-
tion of the Hinayana practice of self-contained meditation,
self-enlightenment, and it is in some sense a form of aggres-
sion. There is no element of compassion and openness because
one is so focused on one's own experience.

Compassion has nothing to do with achievement at all. It is
spacious and very generous. When a person develops real

The Open Way 99

compassion, he is uncertain whether he is being generous to
others or to himself because compassion is environmental
generosity, without direction, without "for me" and without
"for them." It is filled with joy, spontaneously existing joy,
constant joy in the sense of trust, in the sense that joy contains
tremendous wealth, richness.

We could say that compassion is the ultimate attitude of
wealth: an anti-poverty attitude, a war on want. It contains
all sorts of heroic, juicy, positive, visionary, expansive quali-
ties. And it implies larger scale thinking, a freer and more
expansive way of relating to yourself and the world. This is
precisely why the second jana is called the "Mahayana," the
"Great Vehicle." It is the attitude that one has been born
fundamentally rich rather than that one must become rich.
Without this kind of confidence meditation cannot be trans-
ferred into action at all.

Compassion automatically invites you to relate with peo-
ple, because you no longer regard people as a drain on your
energy. They recharge your energy, because in the process of
relating with them you acknowledge your wealth, your rich-
ness. So, if you have difficult tasks to perform, such as dealing
with people or life situations, you do not feel you are running
out of resources. Each time you are faced with a difficult task
it presents itself as a delightful opportunity to demonstrate
your richness, your wealth. There is no feeling of poverty at
all in this approach to life.

Compassion as the key to the open way, the Mahayana,
makes possible the transcendental actions of the hodhisattva.
The Bodhisattva Path starts with generosity and openness —
giving and openness — the surrendering process. Openness is
not a matter of giving something to someone else, but it means
giving up your demand and the basic criteria of the demand.

100 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

This is the dana paramita, the paramita of generosity. It is
learning to trust in the fact that you do not need to secure your
ground, learning to trust in your fundamental richness, that
you can afford to be open. This is the open way. If you give
up your psychological attitude of "demand," then basic health
begins to evolve, which leads to the next act of the bodhisattva,
the shila paramita, the paramita of morality or discipline.

Having opened, having given up everything without refer-
ence to the basic criteria of "I am doing this, I am doing that,"
without reference to oneself, then other situations connected
with maintaining ego or collecting become irrelevant. That is
the ultimate morality and it intensifies the situation of open-
ness and bravery: you are not afraid of hurting yourself or
anyone else because you are completely open. You do not
feel uninspired with situations, which brings patience, the
kshanti paramita. And patience leads to energy, virya — the
quality of delight. There is the tremendous joy of involve-
ment, which is energy, which also brings the panoramic vision
of open meditation — the experience of dhyana — openness.
You do not regard the situation outside as separate from you
because you are so involved with the dance and play of life.

Then you become even more open. You do not regard any-
thing as being rejected or accepted; you are just going along
with each situation. You experience no warfare of any kind,
neither trying to defeat an enemy nor trying to achieve a goal.
There is no involvement with collecting or giving. No hope
or fear at all. This is the development of prajna, transcendent
knowledge, the ability to see situations as they are.

So the main theme of the open way is that we must begin
to abandon the basic struggle of ego. To be completely open,
to have that kind of absolute trust in yourself is the real mean-
ing of compassion and love. There have been so many speeches

Tlu! Open Way 101

about love and peace and tranquility in the world. But how
do we really bring love into being? Christ said, "Love thy
neighbor," but how do we love? How do we do it? How are
we going to radiate our love to the whole of humanity, to the
whole world? "Because we must, and that's the truth!" "If
you don't love, you are condemned, evil; you are doing a dis-
service to humanity." "If you love, you are on the path, you
are on the right track." But how? Many people get very ro-
mantic about love, in fact get high on it at the very word. But
then there will be a gap, a period when we are not high on
love. Something else takes place which is embarrassing, a pri-
vate matter. We tend to seal it off; it is "private parts," shame-
ful, not part of our divinity. Let's not think about that. Let's
simply ignite another love explosion and on and on we go,
trying to ignore those parts of our being we reject, trying to
be virtuous, loving, kind.

Perhaps this will put off a lot of people, but I am afraid
love is not really the experience of beauty and romantic joy
alone. Love is associated with ugliness and pain and aggres-
sion, as well as with the beauty of the world; it is not the re-
creation of heaven. Love or compassion, the open path, is
associated with "what is." In order to develop love — universal
love, cosmic love, whatever you would like to call it — one
must accept the whole situation of life as it is, both the light
and the dark, the good and the bad. One must open oneself
to life, communicate with it. Perhaps you are fighting to de-
velop love and peace, struggling to achieve them: "We are
going to make it, we are going to spend thousands of dollars
in order to broadcast the doctrine of love everywhere, we are
going to proclaim love." Okay, proclaim it, do it, spend your
money, but what about the speed and aggression behind what
you are doing? Why do you have to push us into the accep-

102 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

tance of your love? Why is there such speed and force in-
volved? If your love is moving with the same speed and drive
as other people's hatred, then something appears to be wrong.
It would seem to be the same as calling darkness light. There
is so much ambition involved, taking the form of proselytizing.
It is not an open situation of communication with things as
they are. The ultimate implication of the words "peace on
earth" is to remove altogether the ideas of peace and war and
to open yourself equally and completely to the positive and
negative aspects of the world. It is like seeing the world from
an aerial point of view: there is light, there is dark; both are
accepted. You are not trying to defend the light against the
dark.

The action of the bodhisattva is like the moon shining on
one hundred bowls of water, so that there are one hundred
moons, one in each bowl. This is not the moon's design nor
was it designed by anyone else. But for some strange reason
there happen to be one hundred moons reflected in one hun-
dred bowls of water. Openness means this kind of absolute
trust and self-confidence. The open situation of compassion
works this way rather than by deliberately attempting to
create one hundred moons, one in each bowl.

The basic problem we seem to be facing is that we are too
involved with trying to prove something, which is connected
with paranoia and the feeling of poverty. When you are try-
ing to prove or get something, you are not open anymore, you
have to check everything, you have to arrange it "correctly."
It is such a paranoid way to live and it really does not prove
anything. One might set records in terms of numbers and
quantities — that we have built the greatest, the biggest, we
have collected the most, the longest, the most gigantic. But

The Open Way 103

who is going to remember the record when you are dead? Or
in one hundred years? Or in ten years? Or in ten minutes?
The records that count are those of the given moment, of now
— whether or not communication and openness are actually
taking place now.

This is the open way, the Bodhisattva Path. A bodhisattva
would not care, even if he received a medal from all the Bud-
dhas proclaiming him the bravest bodhisattva in the entire
universe; he would not care at all. You never read stories of
the bodhisattvas receiving medals in the sacred writings. And
quite rightly so, because there is no need for them to prove
anything. The bodhisattva's action is spontaneous, it is the
open life, open communication which does not involve struggle
or speed at all.

Q: I assume that being a bodhisattva means helping people,
and people make specific demands. So a bodhisattva must per-
form specific acts. But how does this idea of being totally open
fit in with the need to perform specific acts?
A: Being open does not mean being unresponsive, a zombie.
It means being free to do whatever is called for in a given
situation. Because you do not want anything from the situa-
tion, you are free to act in the way genuinely appropriate to
it. And, similarly, if other people want something from you,
that may be their problem. You do not have to try to ingratiate
yourself with anyone. Openness means "being what you are."
If you are comfortable being yourself, then an environment
of openness and communication arises automatically and natu-
rally. It is like the idea of the moon and the bowls of water
which we have been discussing: if the bowls are there, they
will reflect your "moonness." If they are not there, they will

104 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

not. Or if they are only half there, then they will reflect only
half a moon. It is up to them. You are just there, the moon,
open, and the bowls may reflect you or not. You neither care
nor do you not care. You are just there.

Situations develop automatically. We do not need to fit our-
selves into special roles and environments. I think many of
us have been trying to do that for a long time, limiting our-
selves, pigeonholing ourselves into narrowly defined sets of
circumstances. We spend so much energy focusing our atten-
tion in just one place that to our surprise we discover that
there are whole areas we have missed.

Q: Can one act with compassion and still get things done as
they need to be done?

A: When there is no speed or aggression, you feel that there
is room enough in which to move about and do things and
you see the things which need to be done more clearly. You
become more efficient and your work becomes more precise.

Q: I believe, Rinpoche, that you made a distinction between
the open path and the internal path. Could you amplify what
differences you see between the internal and the external?
A: Well, the word "internal," as you are using it, seems
to imply struggle, turning back into yourself, considering
whether or not you are a sufficiently worthy, functional and
presentable person. In this approach there is too much "work-
ing on oneself," too much concentration inward. Whereas the
open path is a matter of working purely with what is, of giv-
ing up altogether the fear that something may not work, that
something may end in failure. One has to give up the paranoia
that one might not fit into situations, that one might be re-
jected. One purely deals with life as it is.

Tlie Open Way 105

Q: Where does the attitude of warmth come from?
A: It comes from the absence of aggression.

Q: But isn't that the goal?

A: As well as the path, the bridge. You do not live on the
bridge. You walk over the bridge. In the experience of medi-
tation there is automatically some sense of the absence of
aggression, which is the definition of dharma. Dharma is de-
fined as "dispassion" or "passionlessness," and passionless-
ness implies absence of aggression. If you are passionate, you
want to get something quickly to satisfy your desire. When
there is no desire to satisfy yourself, there is no aggression or
speed. So if a person can really relate to the simplicity of the
practice of meditation, then automatically there is an absence
of aggression. Because there is no rush to achieve, you can
afford to relax. Because you can afford to relax, you can afford
to keep company with yourself, can afford to make love with
yourself, be friends with yourself. Then thoughts, emotions,
whatever occurs in the mind constantly accentuates the act of
making friends with yourself.

Another way to put it is to say that compassion is the earthy
quality of meditation practice, the feeling of earth and solid-
ity. The message of compassionate warmth is to not be hasty
and to relate to each situation as it is. The American Indian
name "Sitting Bull" seems to be a perfect example of this.
"Sitting Bull" is very solid and organic. You are really def-
initely present, resting.

Q: You seemed to say that compassion grows, but it was im-
plied that you do not have to cultivate it.

A: It develops, grows, ferments by itself. It does not need
any effort.

106 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism
Q: Does it die?

A: It does not seem to die. Shantideva says that every un-
compassionate action is like planting a dead tree, but any-
thing related to compassion is like planting a living tree. It
groMfS and grows endlessly and never dies. Even if it seems to
die, it always leaves behind a seed from which another grows.
Compassion is organic; it continues on and on and on.

Q: There is a certain kind of warmth that comes when you
start to relate with someone, and then somehow that energy
becomes overwhelming and catches you up in such a way that
there is no longer any space or room to move.
A: If the warmth is without implication and self-reassur-
ance, then it is self-sustaining and fundamentally healthy.
When you make yoghurt, if you raise the temperature or try
to nurse the yoghurt more than necessary, you do not make
good yoghurt at all. If you leave it at the right temperature
and just abandon it, it will be good yoghurt.

Q: How do you know when to abandon it?
A: You do not constantly have to manage yourself. You
must disown rather than attempt to maintain control, trust
yourself rather than check yourself. The more you try to
check yourself, the greater the possibility of interrupting the
natural play and growth of the situation. Even if what you
are doing is chancy, even if it seems possible that the whole
affair will blow up and become distorted, you do not worry
about it.

Q: What happens when someone creates a situation and you
do worry about it?

The Open Way 107

A: Worrying does not help at all. In fact it makes things
worse.

Q: It seems the process we are talking about requires some
sort of fearlessness.

A: Yes, very much so. It is positive thinking, the mentality
of wealth.

Q: What if you feel the necessity for a violent act in order
ultimately to do good for a person?
A: You just do it.

Q: But if you are not at that point of true compassion and
wisdom?

A: You do not question or worry about your wisdom. You
just do whatever is required. The situation you are facing is
itself profound enough to be regarded as knowledge. You do
not need secondary resources of information. You do not need
reinforcement or guidelines for action. Reinforcement is pro-
vided by the situation automatically. When things must be
conducted in a tough manner, you just do it because the situa-
tion demands your response. You do not impose toughness;
you are an instrument of the situation.

Q: What do you do for a bridge when you don't feel com-
passionate?

A: You do not have to feel compassion. That is the distinc-
tion between emotional compassion and compassion compas-
sion: you do not necessarily feel it; you are it. Usually, if you
are open, compassion happens because you are not preoccu-
pied with some kind of self-indulgence.

108 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

Q: Does the bridge of compassion require continual main-
tenance?

A: I do not think so. It requires acknowledgement rather
than maintenance. That is the mentality of wealth; that you
acknowledge that the bridge is there.

Q: What do you do when you are afraid of someone, per-
haps with reason? For me, this destroys compassion.
A: Compassion is not looking down upon somebody who
needs help, who needs care, but it is general, basic, organic,
positive thinking. The fear of someone else seems to generate
uncertainty as to who you are. That is why you are afraid of
that particular situation or person. Fear comes from uncer-
tainty. If you know exactly how you are going to handle this
frightful situation, then you have no fear. Fear comes from
panic, the bewilderment of uncertainty. Uncertainty is related
to distrust in yourself, feeling that you are inadequate to deal
with that mysterious problem which is threatening you. There
is no fear if you really have a compassionate relationship with
yourself, because then you know what you are doing. If you
know what you are doing, then your projections also become
methodical or predictable, in some sense. Then one develops
prajna, knowledge of how to relate to any given situation.

Q: What do you mean by projections in this context?
A: Projection is the mirror reflection of yourself. Because
you are uncertain about yourself, the world reflects that un-
certainty back to you and the reflection begins to haunt you.
Your uncertainty is haunting you, but it is merely your re-
flection in the mirror.

Q: What do you mean by saying that, if you are compas-

The Open Way 109

sionate towards yourself, then you know what you are doing?
A: These two aspects of meditation always appear simul-
taneously. If you are opening to yourself and have a positive
attitude towards yourself, then automatically you know what
you are doing because you are not a mystery to yourself. This
is jnana, "wisdom," "spontaneously-existing-awareness-wis-
dom." You know that you are spontaneously existing, you
know what you are, therefore you can afford to trust yourself
at the same time.

Q: If I really were to make friends with myself, then I
wouldn't be afraid of making mistakes all the time?
A: That's it. The Tibetan word for wisdom is yeshe, which
means "primordial intelligence." You are yourself at the be-
ginning of any beginning. You could almost call it "unorig-
inated trust in yourself." You do not have to find the beginning
at all. It is a primordial situation, so there is no point in try-
ing to logically find the beginning. It is already. It is begin-
ningless.

Sense of Humor

It would be interesting to examine this subject in terms of
what is not a sense of humor. Lack of humor seems to come
from the attitude of the "hard fact." Things are very hard and
deadly honest, deadly serious, like, to use an analogy, a liv-
ing corpse. He lives in pain, has a continual expression of
pain on his face. He has experienced some kind of hard fact
— "reality" — he is deadly serious and has gone so far as to
become a living corpse. The rigidity of this living corpse ex-
presses the opposite of a sense of humor. It is as though some-
body is standing behind you with a sharp sword. If you are
not meditating properly, sitting still and upright, there will
be someone behind you just about to strike. Or if you are not
dealing with life properly, honestly, directly, someone is just
about to hit you. This is the self-consciousness of watching
yourself, observing yourself unnecessarily. Whatever we do
is constantly being watched and censored. Actually it is not
Big Brother who is watching; it is Big Me! Another aspect
of me is watching me, behind me, just about to strike, just
about to pinpoint my failure. There is no joy in this approach,
no sense of humor at all.

This kind of seriousness relates to the problem of spiritual
materialism as well. "Inasmuch as I am part of a particular

112 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

lineage of meditators, associated with the church and its or-
ganization, because of my religious commitment, I must be
a good boy or girl, an honest, good, church-going person. I
must conform to the standards of the church, its rules and
regulations. If I do not fulfill my obligations I will be con-
demned, reduced to a shrunken body." There is the threat of
solemnity and death — death in the sense of an end to any
further creative process. This attitude has the feeling of limita-
tion, rigidity; there is no room to move about at all.

You might ask then, "What about the great religious tradi-
tions, the teachings? They speak of discipline, rules and regu-
lations. How do we reconcile these with the notion of a sense
of humor?" Well, let's examine the question properly. Are
the regulations, the discipline, the practice of morality really
based on the purely judgmental attitude of "good" as opposed
to "bad"? Are the great spiritual teachings really advocating
that we fight evil because we are on the side of light, the side
of peace? Are they telling us to fight against that other "un-
desirable" side, the bad and the black? That is a big question.
If there is wisdom in the sacred teachings, there should not
be any war. As long as a person is involved with warfare,
trying to defend or attack, then his action is not sacred; it is
mundane, dualistic, a battlefield situation. One would not
expect the great teachings to be as simple-minded as that, try-
ing to be good, fighting the bad. Such would be the approach
of the Hollywood western movie — even before you have seen
the conclusion, you already know precisely that the "goodies"
will not be killed and the "baddies" are going to get smashed.
This approach is obviously simple-minded; but it is just this
type of situation that we are creating in terms of "spiritual"
struggle, "spiritual" achievement.

I am not saying that a sense of humor should be wildly un-

Sense of Humor 113

leashed. 1 am speaking of seeing something more than just
warfare, struggle, duality. If we regard the path of spiritu-
ality as a battlefield, then we are weak and feeble. Then our
progress on the path will depend upon how great an area we
have conquered, upon the subjugation of our own and others'
faults, upon how much negativity we have eliminated. Rela-
tive to how much dark you have eliminated, that much light
you have been able to produce. That is very feeble; one could
hardly call it liberation or freedom or mukti or nirvana. You
have achieved liberation by defeating something else: it is
purely relative.

I do not want to make a "sense of humor" into something
solemn; I am afraid that people are going to do that. But in
order to really understand rigidity, that which is represented
by the corpse, one cannot avoid the danger of making a sense
of humor into a serious thing. Sense of humor means seeing
both poles of a situation as they are, from an aerial point of
view. There is good and there is bad and you see both with
a panoramic view as though from above. Then you begin to
feel that these little people on the ground, killing each other
or making love or just being little people, are very insignif-
icant in the sense that, if they begin to make a big deal of their
warfare or love making, then we begin to see the ironic aspect
of their clamor. If we try very hard to build something tre-
mendous, really meaningful, powerful — "I'm really search-
ing for something, I'm really trying to fight my faults," or
"I'm really trying to be good," — then it loses its seriousness,
becomes a paper tiger; it is extremely ironic.

Sense of humor seems to come from all-pervading joy, joy
which has room to expand into a completely open situation
because it is not involved with the battle between "this" and
"that". Joy develops into the panoramic situation of seeing

114 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

or feeling the whole ground, the open ground. This open situa-
tion has no hint of limitation, of imposed solemnity. And if
you do try to treat life as a "serious business," if you try to
impose solemnity upon life as though everything is a big deal,
then it is funny. Why such a big deal?

A person might attempt to meditate in a 100% or 200%
correct posture. Big Deal. Funny. Or on the other hand, a per-
son might try to develop a sense of humor, trying always to
make fun of things, to find humor in every corner, every crack.
That in itself is a very serious game, which is equally funny.
If you build up physical tension to the point where you are
clenching your teeth, biting your tongue, then suddenly some-
thing will tickle you because you have been building too much;
it is too absurd to go to such extremes. That extreme intensity
itself becomes humor, automatically.

There is the Tibetan story of a certain monk who renounced
his samsaric, confused life and decided to go live in a cave
in order to meditate all the time. Prior to this he had been
thinking continually of pain and sulfering. His name was
Ngonagpa of Langru, the Black-faced One of Langru, because
he never smiled at all but saw everything in life in terms of
pain. He remained in retreat for many years, very solemn and
deadly honest, until one day he looked at the shrine and saw
that someone had presented a big lump of turquoise as a gift
to him. As he viewed the gift, he saw a mouse creep in and
try to drag away the piece of turquoise. The mouse could not
do it, so it sent back to its hole and called another mouse. They
both tried to drag away this big lump of turquoise but could
not do it. So they squeaked together and called eight more
mice who came and finally managed to drag the whole lump
back into their hole. Then for the first time Ngonagpa of

Sense of Humor 115

Langru began to laugh and smile. And that was his first intro-
duction to openness, a sudden flash of enlightenment.

So a sense of humor is not merely a matter of trying to tell
jokes or make puns, trying to be funny in a deliberate fashion.
It involves seeing the basic irony of the juxtaposition of ex-
tremes, so that one is not caught taking them seriously, so
that one does not seriously play their game of hope and fear.
This is why the experience of the spiritual path is so signif-
icant, why the practice of meditation is the most insignificant
experience of all. It is insignificant because you place no value
judgment on it. Once you are absorbed into that insignificant
situation of openness without involvement in value judgment,
then you begin to see all the games going on around you.
Someone is trying to be stern and spiritually solemn, trying
to be a good person. Such a person might take it seriously if
someone offended him, might want to fight. If you work in
accordance with the basic insignificance of what is, then you
begin to see the humor in this kind of solemnity, in people
making such a big deal about things.

Q: Most of the arguments I've heard for doing the good
thing and the right thing say: First accumulate merit, be good,
give up evil ; then later on it will be even easier to give up the
"good hang-ups." What do you make of this approach?
A: If we look at it from the point of view of a sense of hu-
mor, the idea of "giving up" seems to be too literal and naive.
If you are attempting to be good and give up everything,
ironically it is not giving up at all; it is taking on more things.
That is the funny part of it. Someone might think himself able
to abandon the big load he is carrying but the absence of the
load, the giving up, is heavier, hundreds of times heavier than

116 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

what the person has left behind. It is easy to give something up
but the by-product of such renunciation could consist of some
very heavy virtue. Each time you meet someone you will be
thinking or will actually say, "I have given up this and that."
"Giving up" can become heavier and heavier, as though you
were carrying a big bag of germs on your back. Finally it
might become a big fungus that you are carrying, growing
faster and faster. At some stage a person begins to become
completely unbearable because he has given up so many
things.

For that matter, if we treat the practice of meditation as a
serious matter, a matter of consequence, then it will become
embarrassing and heavy, overwhelming. We will not even be
able to think about it. It would be as though a person had
eaten an extremely heavy meal. He is just about to get sick
and he will begin to think, "I wish I were hungry. At least
that would feel light. But now I have all this food in my sto-
mach and I am just about to be sick. I wish I had never eaten."
One cannot take spirituality so seriously. It is self-defeating,
counter to the true meaning of "giving up."

Q: Is a sense of tragedy then something that an enlightened
person has overcome?

A: You do not necessarily have to be enlightened to give up
tragedy. If you are involved with the intensity of crescendo
situations, with the intensity of tragedy, then you might begin
to see the humor of these situations as well. As in music, when
we hear the crescendo building, suddenly if the music stops,
we begin to hear the silence as part of the music. It is not an
extraordinary experience at all: it is very ordinary, very mun-
dane. That is why I said it is one of the most insignificant ex-
periences of all, because we do not attach our value judgments

Sense of Humor 117

to it. The experience is hardly there. Of course if we employ
the basic twist of ego, we could go on and say that because the
experience is hardly there, because it is so insignificant, there-
fore it is one of the most valuable and extraordinary experi-
ences of all. This would just be a conceptualized way of trying
to prove that what you are involved in is a big deal. It is not
a big deal.

Q: Is sense of humor related in any way to the experience
of instant enlightenment, satori?

A: Certainly. There is the story of a person who died laugh-
ing. He was a simple village person who asked a teacher the
color of Amitabha which traditionally, iconographically, is
red. Somehow, by mistake, he thought the teacher said Ami-
tabha's color was the color of ash in a fire. And this influenced
his whole meditation practice; because when he practiced
visualizing Amitabha, it was a grey Amitabha.

Finally the man was dying. As he lay on his deathbed he
wanted to make sure, so he asked another teacher the color
of Amitabha. The teacher said that Amitabha's color was red
and the man suddenly burst into laughter: "Well, I used to
think him the color of ash, and now you tell me he is red."
He burst into laughter and died laughing. So it is a question of
overcoming some kind of seriousness.

There are many stories of people who were actually able
to see the awakened state by breaking into laughter — seeing
the contrast, the irony of polar situations. For instance there
was the hermit whose devotee lived several miles away in a
village. This devotee supported the hermit, supplying him with
food and the other necessities of life. Most of the time the
devotee sent his wife or daughter or son to bring the hermit
his supplies; but one day the hermit heard that the donor him-

118 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

self was coming to see him. The hermit thought, "I must im-
press him, I must clean and polish the shrine objects and make
the shrine very neat and my room extremely tidy." So he
cleaned and rearranged everything until his shrine looked
very impressive with bowls of water and butter lamps burn-
ing brightly. And when he had finished, he sat down and be-
gan to admire the room and look around. Everything looked
very neat, somehow unreal, and he saw that his shrine ap-
peared unreal as well. Suddenly, to his surprise he realized
that he was being a hypocrite. Then he went into the kitchen
and got hand-fulls of ashes and threw them at the shrine until
his room was a complete mess. When his patron came, he was
extremely impressed by the natural quality of the room, by
its not being tidy. The hermit could not hold himself together.
He burst into laughter and said, "I tried to tidy myself and
my room, but then I thought perhaps I should show it to you
this way." And so they both, patron and hermit, burst into
laughter. That was a great moment of awakening for both of
them.

Q: In each lecture you describe some seemingly inescapable
situation in which we are all trapped, in which we have al-
ready become enmeshed. I just wonder if you ever mean to
imply that there is a way out?

A: You see, the whole point is that if we are speaking of a
way out all the time, then we are dealing in fantasy, the dream
of escape, salvation, enlightenment. We need to be practical.
We must examine what is here, now, our neurotic mind. Once
we are completely familiar with the negative aspects of the
state of our being, then we know the "way out" automatically.
But if we talk about how beautiful and joyous our attainment
of the goal will be, then we become extremely sincere and ro-
mantic; and this approach becomes an obstacle.

Sense of Humor 119

One must be practical. It is like visiting your physician be-
cause you are ill. If a doctor is going to treat you, then he
must first know what is wrong with you. It is not a question of
what could be right with you; that is not relevant. If you tell
the doctor what is wrong with you, then that is the way out of
your illness. That is why the Buddha taught the Four Noble
Truths, his first teaching. One must begin with the realization
of pain, duhkha, suffering. Then having realized duhkha, one
goes on to the origin of suffering and the path leading out of
suffering and liberation. The Buddha did not begin by teach-
ing the beauty of the enlightenment experience.

Q: Following the usual patterns of evaluation and judgment,
I find myself thinking that the errors and obstacles which you
describe in later lectures are somehow more advanced than
those described in the earlier lectures. Is this correct?
A: That is true. Even after one has stepped onto the path,
as in the case of bodhisattvas, once you have begun to awaken
there could be a tendency to analyze your awakened state. This
involves looking at oneself, analyzing and evaluating, and
continues until there is a sharp blow which is called the vajra-
like samadhi. This is the last samadhi state of meditation. The
attainment of enlightenment is called "vajra-like" because it
does not stand for any nonsense; it just cuts right through all
our games. In the story of the Buddha's life we hear of the
temptations of Mara, which are extremely subtle. The first
temptation is fear of physical destruction. The last is the se-
duction by the daughters of Mara. This seduction, the seduc-
tion of spiritual materialism, is extremely powerful because
it is the seduction of thinking that "I" have achieved some-
thing. If we think we have achieved something, that we have
"made it," then we have been seduced by Mara's daughters,
the seduction of spiritual materialism.

The Development of Ego

As we are going to examine the Buddhist path from beginning
to end, from the beginner's mind to the enlightened one, I
think it would be best to start with something very concrete
and realistic, the field we are going to cultivate. It would be
foolish to study more advanced subjects before we are familiar
with the starting point, the nature of ego. We have a saying
in Tibet that, before the head has been cooked properly, grab-
bing the tongue is of no use. Any spiritual practice needs this
basic understanding of the starting point, the material with
which we are working.

If we do not know the material with which we are working,
then our study is useless; speculations about the goal become
mere fantasy. These speculations may take the form of ad-
vanced ideas and descriptions of spiritual experiences, but
they only exploit the weaker aspects of human nature, our
expectations and desires to see and hear something colorful,
something extraordinary. If we begin our study with these
dreams of extraordinary, "enlightening" and dramatic ex-
periences, then we will build up our expectations and pre-
conceptions so that later, when we are actually working on
the path, our minds will be occupied largely with what will be
rather than with what is. It is destructive and not fair to people

122 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

to play on their weaknesses, their expectations and dreams,
rather than to present the realistic starting point of what they
are.

It is necessary, therefore, to start on what we are and why
we are searching. Generally, all religious traditions deal with
this material, speaking variously of alaya-vijnana or original
sin or the fall of man or the basis of ego. Most religions refer
to this material in a somewhat pejorative way, but I do not
think it is such a shocking or terrible thing. We do not have
to be ashamed of what we are. As sentient beings we have
wonderful backgrounds. These backgrounds may not be par-
ticularly enlightened or peaceful or intelligent. Nevertheless,
we have soil good enough to cultivate; we can plant anything
in it. Therefore, in dealing with this subject we are not con-
demning or attempting to eliminate our ego-psychology; we
are purely acknowledging it, seeing it as it is. In fact, the
understanding of ego is the foundation of Buddhism. So let
us look at how ego develops.

Fundamentally there is just open space, the basic ground,
what we really are. Our most fundamental state of mind, be-
fore the creation of ego, is such that there is basic openness,
basic freedom, a spacious quality; and we have now and have
always had this openness. Take, for example, our everyday
lives and thought patterns. When we see an object, in the first
instant there is a sudden perception which has no logic or con-
ceptualization to it at all; we just perceive the thing in the
open ground. Then immediately we panic and begin to rush
about trying to add something to it, either trying to find a name
for it or trying to find pigeon-holes in which we could locate
and categorize it. Gradually things develop from there.
This development does not take the shape of a solid entity.

The Development of Ego 123

Rather, this development is illusory, the mistaken belief in a
"self" or "ego." Confused mind is inclined to view itself as
a solid, on-going thing, but it is only a collection of tendencies,
events. In Buddhist terminology this collection is referred to
as the Five Skandhas or Five Heaps. So perhaps we could go
through the whole development of the Five Skandhas.

The beginning point is that there is open space, belonging
to no one. There is always primordial intelligence connected
with the space and openness. Vidya, which means "intelli-
gence" in Sanskrit — precision, sharpness, sharpness with
space, sharpness with room in which to put things, exchange
things. It is like a spacious hall where there is room to dance
about, where there is no danger of knocking things over or
tripping over things, for there is completely open space. We
are this space, we are one with it, with vidya, intelligence and
openness.

But if we are this all the time, where did the confusion come
from, where has the space gone, what has happened? Nothing
has happened, as a matter of fact. We just became too active
in that space. Because it is spacious, it brings inspiration to
dance about; but our dance became a bit too active, we began
to spin more than was necessary to express the space. At this
point we became 5e//-conscious, conscious that "I" am dancing
in the space.

At such a point, space is no longer space as such. It be-
comes solid. Instead of being one with the space, we feel solid
space as a separate entity, as tangible. This is the first ex-
perience of duality — space and I, I am dancing in this space,
and this spaciousness is a solid, separate thing. Duality means
"space and I," rather than being completely one with the
space. This is the birth of "form," of "other."

124 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

Then a kind of blackout occurs, in the sense that we forget
what we were doing. There is a sudden halt, a pause; and we
turn around and "discover" solid space, as though we had
never before done anything at all, as though we were not the
creators of all that solidity. There is a gap. Having already
created solidified space, then we are overwhelmed by it and
begin to become lost in it. There is a blackout and then, sud-
denly, an awakening.

When we awaken, we refuse to see the space as openness,
refuse to see its smooth and ventilating quality. We com-
pletely ignore it, which is called avidya. A means "negation,"
vidya means "intelligence," so it is "un-intelligence." Because
this extreme intelligence has been transformed into the per-
ception of solid space, because this intelligence with a sharp
and precise and flowing luminous quality has become static,
therefore it is called avidya, "ignorance." We deliberately
ignore. We are not satisfied just to dance in the space but we
want to have a partner, and so we choose the space as our part-
ner. If you choose space as your partner in the dance, then of
course you want it to dance with you. In order to possess it as
a partner, you have to solidify it and ignore its flowing, open
quality. This is avidya, ignorance, ignoring the intelligence.
It is the culmination of the First Skandha, the creation of Ig-
norance-Form.

In fact, this skandha, the skandha of Ignorance-Form, has
three different aspects or stages which we could examine
through the use of another metaphor. Suppose in the begin-
ning there is an open plain without any mountains or trees,
completely open land, a simple desert without any particular
characteristics. That is how we are, what we are. We are very
simple and basic. And yet there is a sun shining, a moon shin-
ing, and there will be lights and colors, the texture of the

The Development of Ego 125

desert. There will be some feeling of the energy which plays
between heaven and earth. This goes on and on.

Then, strangely, there is suddenly someone to notice all
this. It is as if one of the grains of sand had stuck its neck out
and begun to look around. We are that grain of sand, coming
to the conclusion of our separateness. This is the "Birth of
Ignorance" in its first stage, a kind of chemical reaction. Du-
ality has begun.

The second stage of Ignorance-Form is called "The Ignor-
ance Born Within." Having noticed that one is separate, then
there is the feeling that one has always been so. It is an awk-
wardness, the instinct toward self-consciousness. It is also one's
excuse for remaining separate, an individual grain of sand.
It is an aggressive type of ignorance, though not exactly ag-
gressive in the sense of anger; it has not developed as far as
that. Rather it is aggression in the sense that one feels awk-
ward, unbalanced, and so one tries to secure one's ground,
create a shelter for oneself. It is the attitude that one is a con-
fused and separate individual, and that is all there is to it.
One has identified oneself as separate from the basic land-
scape of space and openness.

The third type of ignorance is "Self-Observing Ignorance,"
watching oneself. There is a sense of seeing oneself as an ex-
ternal object, which leads to the first notion of "other." One
is beginning to have a relationship with a so-called "external"
world. This is why these three stages of ignorance constitute
the Skandha of Form-Ignorance; one is beginning to create
the world of forms.

When we speak of "ignorance" we do not mean stupidity
at all. In a sense, ignorance is very intelligent, but it is a com-
pletely two-way intelligence. That is to say, one purely reacts
to one's projections rather than just seeing what is. There is

126 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

no situation of "letting be" at all, because one is ignoring
what one is all the time. That is the basic definition of ignor-
ance.

The next development is the setting up of a defense mecha-
nism to protect our ignorance. This defense mechanism is
Feeling, the Second Skandha. Since we have already ignored
open space, we would like next to feel the qualities of solid
space in order to bring complete fulfillment to the grasping
quality we are developing. Of course space does not mean
just bare space, for it contains color and energy. There are
tremendous, magnificent displays of color and energy, beauti-
ful and picturesque. But we have ignored them altogether.
Instead there is just a solidified version of that color; and the
color becomes captured color, and the energy becomes cap-
tured energy, because we have solidified the whole space and
turned it into "other." So we begin to reach out and feel the
qualities of "other." By doing this we reassure ourselves that
we exist. "If I can feel that out there, then I must be here."

Whenever anything happens, one reaches out to feel whether
the situation is seductive or threatening or neutral. Whenever
there is a sudden separation, a feeling of not knowing the re-
lationship of "that" to "this," we tend to feel for our ground.
This is the extremely efficient feeling mechanism that we be-
gin to set up, the Second Skandha.

The next mechanism to further establish ego is the Third
Skandha, Perception-Impulse. We begin to be fascinated by
our own creation, the static colors and the static energies. We
want to relate to them, and so we begin gradually to explore
our creation.

In order to explore efficiently there must be a kind of
switchboard system, a controller of the feeling mechanism.
Feeling transmits its information to the central switchboard,

The Development of Ego 127

which is the act of perception. According to that information,
we make judgments, we react. Whether we should react for or
against or indifferently is automatically determined by this
bureaucracy of feeling and perception. If we feel the situation
and find it threatening, then we will push it away from us. If
we find it seductive, then we will draw it to us. If we find it
neutral, we will be indifi^erent. These are the three types of
impulse: hatred, desire, and stupidity. Thus perception refers
to receiving information from the outside world and impulse
refers to our response to that information.

The next development is the Fourth Skandha, Concept. Per-
ception-Impulse is an automatic reaction to intuitive feeling.
However, this kind of automatic reaction is not really enough
of a defense to protect one's ignorance and guarantee one's
security. In order to really protect and deceive oneself com-
pletely, properly, one needs intellect, the ability to name and
categorize things. Thus we label things and events as being
"good," "bad," "beautiful," "ugly," and so on, according to
which impulse we find appropriate to them.

So the structure of ego is gradually becoming heavier and
heavier, stronger and stronger. Up to this point ego's develop-
ment has been purely an action and reaction process; but from
now on ego gradually develops beyond the ape instinct and
becomes more sophisticated. We begin to experience intellec-
tual speculation, confirming or interpreting ourselves, putting
ourselves into certain logical, interpretive situations. The basic
nature of intellect is quite logical. Obviously there will be the
tendency to work for a positive condition: to confirm our ex-
perience, to interpret weakness into strength, to fabricate a
logic of security, to confirm our ignorance.

In a sense, it might be said that the primordial intelligence
is operating all the time, but it is being employed by the

128 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

dualistic fixation, ignorance. In the beginning stages of the
development of ego this intelligence operates as the intuitive
sharpness of feeling. Later it operates in the form of intellect.
Actually it seems that there is no such thing as the ego at all ;
there is no such thing as "1 am." It is an accumulation of a
lot of stuff. It is a "brilliant work of art," a product of the
intellect which says, "Let's give it a name, let's call it some-
thing, let's call it '1 am'," which is very clever. "I" is the
product of intellect, the label which unifies into one whole the
disorganized and scattered development of ego.

The last stage of the development of ego is the Fifth
Skandha, Consciousness. At this level an amalgamation takes
place: the intuitive intelligence of the Second Skandha, the
energy of the Third, and the intellectualization of the Fourth
combine to produce thoughts and emotions. Thus at the level
of the Fifth Skandha we find the Six Realms as well as the
uncontrollable and illogical patterns of discursive thought.

This is the complete picture of ego. It is in this state that
all of us have arrived at our study of Buddhist psychology and
meditation.

In Buddhist literature there is a metaphor commonly used
to describe this whole process, the creation and development
of ego. It speaks of a monkey locked in an empty house, a
house with five windows representing the five senses. This
monkey is inquisitive, poking its head out of each window
and jumping up and down, up and down, restlessly. He is a
captive monkey in an empty house. It is a solid house, rather
than the jungle in which the monkey leapt and swung, rather
than the trees in which he could hear the wind moving and
the rustling of the leaves and branches. All these things have
become completely solidified. In fact, the jungle itself has
become his solid house, his prison. Instead of perching in a

The Development of Ego 129

tree, this inquisitive monkey lias been walled in by a solid
world, as if a flowing thing, a dramatic and beautiful water-
fall, had suddenly been frozen. This frozen house, made of
frozen colors and energies, is completely still. This seems to
be the point where time begins as past, future and present.
The flux of things becomes solid tangible time, a solid idea of
time.

The inquisitive monkey awakens from his blackout, but
he does not awaken completely. He awakens to find himself
trapped inside of a solid, claustrophobic house with just five
windows. He becomes bored, as though captured in a zoo be-
hind iron bars, and he tries to explore the bars by climbing
up and down. That he has been captured is not particularly
important; but the idea of capture is magnified a thousand
times because of his fascination with it. If one is fascinated,
the sense of claustrophobia becomes more and more vivid,
more and more acute, because one begins to explore one's
imprisonment. In fact fascination is part of the reason he
remains imprisoned. He is captured by his fascination. Of
course at the beginning there was the sudden blackout which
confirmed his belief in a solid world. But now having taken
solidity for granted, he is trapped by his involvement with it.

Of course this inquisitive monkey does not explore all the
time. He begins to become agitated, begins to feel that some-
thing is very repetitive and uninteresting, and he begins to
become neurotic. Hungry for entertainment, he tries to feel
and appreciate the texture of the wall, attempting to make
sure that this seeming solidity is really solid. Then, assured
that the space is solid, the monkey begins to relate to it by
grasping it, repelling it or ignoring it. If he attempts to grasp
the space in order to possess it as his own experience, his own
discovery, his own understanding, this is desire. Or, if the

130 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

space seems a prison to him so that he tries to kick and batter
his way out, fighting harder and harder, then this is hatred.
Hatred is not just the mentality of destruction alone; but it
is even more a feeling of defensiveness, defending oneself
against claustrophobia. The monkey does not necessarily feel
that there is an opponent or enemy approaching; he simply
wants to escape his prison.

Finally the monkey might try to ignore that he is imprisoned
or that there is something seductive in his environment. He
plays deaf and dumb and so is indifferent and slothful in
relation to what is happening around him. This is stupidity.

To go back a bit, you might say that the monkey is born
into his house as he awakens from the blackout. He does not
know how he arrived in this prison, so he assumes he has
always been there, forgetting that he himself solidified the
space into walls. Then he feels the texture of the walls, which
is the Second Skandha, Feeling. After that, he relates to the
house in terms of desire, hatred, and stupidity, the Third
Skandha, Perception-Impulse. Then, having developed these
three ways of relating to his house, the monkey begins to label
and categorize it: "This is a window. This corner is pleasant.
That wall frightens me and is bad." He develops a conceptual
framework with which to label and categorize and evaluate
his house, his world, according to whether he desires, hates,
or feels indifferent to it. This is the Fourth Skandha, Concept.

The monkey's development through the Fourth Skandha
has been fairly logical and predictable. But the })attern of
development begins to break down as he enters the Fifth
Skandha, Consciousness. The thought pattern becomes irregu-
lar and unpredictable and the monkey begins to hallucinate,
to dream.

The Development of Ego 131

When we speak of "hallucination" or "dream," it means
that we attach values to things and events which they do not
necessarily have. We have definite opinions about the way
things are and should be. This is projection: we project our
version of things onto what is there. Thus we become com-
pletely immersed in a world of our own creation, a world of
conflicting values and opinions. Hallucination, in this sense,
is a misinterpretation of things and events, reading into the
phenomenal world meanings which it does not have.

This is what the monkey begins to experience at the level
of the fifth Skandha. Having tried to get out and having
failed, he feels dejected, helpless, and so he begins to go
completely insane. Because he is so tired of struggling, it is
very tempting for him to relax and let his mind wander
and hallucinate. This is the creation of the Six Lokas or Six
Realms. There is a great deal of discussion in the Buddhist
tradition about hell beings, people in heaven, the human
world, the animal realm, and other psychological states of
being. These are the diiferent kinds of projections, the dream
worlds we create for ourselves.

Having struggled and failed to escape, having experienced
claustrophobia and pain, this monkey begins to wish for some-
thing good, something beautiful and seductive. So the first
realm he begins to hallucinate is the Deva Loka, the God
Realm, "heaven," a place filled with beautiful, splendid
things. The monkey dreams of strolling out of his house, walk-
ing in luxuriant fields, eating ripe fruit, sitting and swinging
in the trees, living a life of freedom and ease.

Then he also begins to hallucinate the A sura Realm, or the
Realm of the Jealous Gods. Having experienced the dream of
heaven, the monkey wants to defend and maintain his great

132 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

bliss and happiness. He suffers from paranoia, worrying that
others may try to take his treasures from him, and so he begins
to feel jealousy. He is proud of himself, has enjoyed his
creation of the God Realm, and this has led him into jealousy
of the Asura Realm.

Then he also perceives the earth-bound quality of these
experiences. Instead of simply alternating between jealousy
and pride, he begins to feel comfortable, at home in the "hu-
man world," the "earthy world." It is the world of just lead-
ing a regular life, doing things ordinarily, in a mundane
fashion. This is the Human Realm.

But then the monkey also senses that something is a bit dull,
something is not quite flowing. This is because, as he progresses
from the Realm of the Gods to the Realm of the Jealous Gods
to the Realm of Human Beings and his hallucinations be-
come more and more solid, then this whole development
begins to feel rather heavy and stupid. At this point he is
born into the Animal Realm. He would rather crawl or moo
or bark than enjoy the pleasure of pride or envy. This is the
simplicity of the animals.

Then the process is intensified, and the monkey starts to
experience a desperate feeling of starvation, because he really
does not want to descend to any lower realms. He would like
to return to the pleasure realms of the gods; so he begins to
feel hunger and thirst, a tremendous feeling of nostalgia for
what he remembers once having had. This is the Realm of
the Hungry Ghosts or Preta Realm.

Then there is a sudden losing of faith and the monkey
begins to doubt himself and his world, begins to react vio-
lently. All this is a terrible nightmare. He realizes that such
a nightmare could not be true and he begins to hate himself

The Development of Ego 133

for creating all this horror. This is the dream of the Hell
Realm, the last of the Six Realms.

Throughout the entire development of the Six Realms the
monkey has experienced discursive thoughts, ideas, fantasies,
and whole thought patterns. Up to the level of the Fifth
Skandha his process of psychological evolution has been very
regular and predictable. From the First Skandha each suc-
cessive development arose in a systematic pattern, like an
overlay of tiles on a roof. But now the monkey's state of
mind becomes very distorted and disturbed, as suddenly this
mental jigsaw puzzle erupts and his thought patterns become
irregular and unpredictable. This seems to be our state of
mind as we come to the teachings and the practice of medi-
tation. This is the place from which v/e must start our practice.

I think that it is very important to discuss the basis of the
path — ego, our confusion — before we speak of liberation and
freedom. If I were only to discuss the experience of libera-
tion, that would be very dangerous. This is why we begin by
considering the development of ego. It is a kind of psycho-
logical portrait of our mental states. I am afraid this has not
been an especially beautiful talk, but we have to face the
facts. That seems to be the process of working on the path.

Q: Could you say something more about what you mean by
the "blackout?"

A: It is nothing particularly profound. It is just that at the
level of the First Skandha we have worked very hard on
trying to solidify space. We have worked so hard and with
such speed that intelligence suddenly collapses. This could
be said to be a kind of reverse satori, reverse enlightenment
experience, the experience of ignorance. You suddenly go into

134 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

a trance, because you have worked so hard. This is something
which you have actually achieved, a masterpiece, all this
solidity. And having achieved it completely, then suddenly
you are overwhelmed by it. It is a meditation of its kind, a
sort of reverse samadhi.

Q: Do you think that people have to be aware of death in
order actually to be alive?

A: I don't think you have to be particularly aware of death,
in the sense of analyzing it, but you just have to see what you
are. Often we tend to look for the positive side, the beauty
of spirituality, and ignore ourselves as we are. This is the
greatest danger. If we are engaged in self-analysis, our spir-
itual practice is trying to find some ultimate analysis, an
ultimate self-deception. Ego's intelligence is tremendously
talented. It can distort anything. If one seizes on the ideas
of spirituality or self-analysis or transcendence of ego, im-
mediately ego takes hold of them and translates them into
self-deception.

Q: When the monkey starts to hallucinate, is it something
he has known before? Where does hallucination come from?
A: It is a kind of instinct, a secondary instinct, the ape
instinct that we all have. If there is pain, then one will hal-
lucinate pleasure, by contrast. There is the urge to defend
oneself, establish one's territory.

Q: Equipped only with the level of consciousness we now
have, are we not doomed to fight and struggle hopelessly at
this level, unless we can get back to the space you have been
describing?

The Development of Ego 135

A: Of course we are going to fight all the time, there is no
end. We could go on talking forever about the succession of
struggles we will endure. There is no other answer at all,
except just as you said, trying to find the primordial space
again. Otherwise we are stuck in the psychological attitude
of this as opposed to that, which is an obstacle. We are al-
ways fighting an opponent. There is never a moment when
we give up fighting. The problem is duality, warfare in terms
of I and my opponent.

The practice of meditation is a completely different way
of working. One has to change one's whole attitude and way
of conducting life. One has to change all one's policies, so
to speak. This could be very painful. Suddenly one begins to
realize, "If I do not fight, how am I going to deal with my
enemies? It is all very well for me not to fight, but what about
them? They are still going to be there." That is the interest-
ing point.

Q: To see the wall and recognize that you are there and
not go further — it seems like a verj' dangerous position.
A: That is precisely it; it isn't dangerous. It might be pain-
ful at the time to realize that the wall is solid and that you
are trapped inside it, but that is the interesting point.

Q: But weren't you just saying that it is instinctive to want
to return to the other state, the open space?
A: Of course, but this monkey will not let himself just be
anymore. He continually fights, or else he is involved in
hallucinations. He never stops, never allows himself to actu-
ally feel anything properly. That is the problem. That is why
simply stopping, just allowing a gap, is the first step in the
practice of meditation.

136 Cutting Through Spiritual Materinlism

Q: Say you have a barrier, an inhibition, and you are very
aware of it. Should the inhibition just disappear through
your awareness of it?

A: The whole point is that we must not attempt to figure
out how we are going to escape our dilemma, but for now
we must think about all these claustrophobic rooms that we
are in. This is the first step to learning. We have to actually
identify ourselves and feel ourselves properly. This will pro-
vide us with inspiration for further study. We had better not
speak of getting free yet.

Q: Would you say that these claustrophobic rooms were
intellectual fabrications?

A: The intensity of the primordial intelligence triggers us
off all the time. All these activities of the monkey are, there-
fore, not to be regarded as something we should escape but
as something which is a product of primordial intelligence.
The more we try to struggle, the more we will discover that
the walls really are solid. The more energy we put into strug-
gle, by that much will we strengthen the walls, because the
walls need our attention to solidify them. Whenever we pay
more attention to the walls, we begin to feel the hopelessness
of escape.

Q: What does the monkey perceive when he looks out of
the five windows of the house?

A: Well, he perceives the east, west, south and north.

Q: How do they look to him?
A: A square world.

Q: What about outside the house?

The Development of Ego 137
A: Well, a square world, because he sees through windows.

Q: He doesn't see anything in the distance?

A: He could, but it is also a square picture, because it is

like hanging a picture on the wall, isn't it?

Q: What happens to the monkey when he takes a little LSD
or peyote?

A: He has already taken it.

The Six Realms

When we left the monkey, he was in the Hell Realm, trying
to kick and claw and push his way through the walls of his
house. The monkey's experiences in the Hell Realm are quite
terrifying and horrific. He finds himself walking through gi-
gantic fields of red-hot iron, or being chained and marked
with black lines and cut apart, or roasting in hot iron cubicles,
or boiling in large cauldrons. These and the other hallucina-
tions of Hell are generated from an environment of claustro-
phobia and aggression. There is a feeling of being trapped
in a small space with no air to breathe and no room in which
to move about. Trapped as he is, the monkey not only tries to
destroy the walls of his claustrophobic prison; he even at-
tempts to kill himself in order to escape his excruciating and
continuous pain. But he cannot really kill himself, and his
suicide attempts only intensify his torture. The more the mon-
key struggles to destroy or control the walls, the more solid
and oppressive they become, until at some point the intensity
of the monkey's aggression wears out a bit and, instead of
battling with the walls, he stops relating to them, stops com-
municating with them. He becomes paralyzed, frozen, remain-
ing enveloped in pain without struggling to escape it. Here

The Six Realms 139

he experiences the various tortures involving freezing and
dwelling in harsh, barren, desolate areas.

However, eventually the monkey begins to become ex-
hausted from his struggle. The intensity of the Hell Realm
begins to diminish, the monkey begins to relax, and suddenly
he sees the possibility of a more open, spacious way to be.
He hungers for this new state, and this is the Realm of the
Hungry Ghost or Preta Loka: the feeling of impoverishment
and hunger for relief. In the Hell Realm he had been too busy
struggling to even have time to consider the possibility of
relief. Now he experiences great hunger for more pleasurable,
spacious conditions and fantasizes numerous ways to satisfy
his hunger. He may imagine that he sees far away from him
some open space, but when he approaches it, he finds a vast
terrifying desert. Or he may see in the distance a huge fruit
tree, but as he goes closer to it, he discovers that it is barren
or that someone is guarding it. Or the monkey may fly to a
seemingly lush and fertile valley, only to find it filled with
poisonous insects and the repelling smells of rotting vegeta-
tion. In each of his fantasies he glimpses the possibility of
satisfaction, reaches out for it, and is quickly disappointed.
Each time he seems about to achieve pleasure, he is rudely
awakened from his idyllic dream; but his hunger is so de-
manding that he is not daunted and so continues to constantly
churn out fantasies of future satisfaction. The pain of dis-
appointment involves the monkey in a love-hate relationship
with his dreams. He is fascinated by them, but the disappoint-
ment is so painful that he is repelled by them as well.

The torture of the Hungry Ghost Realm is not so much the
pain of not finding what he wants; rather it is the insatiable
hunger itself which causes pain. Probably if the monkey

140 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

found large quantities of food, he would not touch it at all;
or else he would eat everything and then desire more. This
is because, fundamentally, the monkey is fascinated with
being hungry rather than with satisfying his hunger. The
quick frustration of his attempts to satisfy his hunger enables
him to be hungry again. So the pain and hunger of the Preta
Loka, as with the aggression of the Hell Realm and the pre-
occupations of the other realms, provide the monkey with
something exciting to occupy himself, something solid to re-
late to, something to make him feel secure that he exists as
a real person. He is afraid to give up this security and enter-
tainment, afraid to venture out into the unknown world of
open space. He would rather stay in his familiar prison, no
matter how painful and oppressive it might be.

However, as the monkey is repeatedly frustrated in his
attempts to fulfill his fantasies, he begins to become somewhat
resentful and at the same time resigned. He begins to give up
the intensity of hunger and relax further into a set series of
habitual responses to the world. He ignores other ways of
dealing with life experiences, relies on the same set of re-
sponses, and in this way limits his world: a dog tries to smell
everything with which it comes into contact; a cat takes no
interest in television. This is the Animal Realm, the realm
of stupidity. The monkey blinds himself to what is around
him and refuses to explore new territory, clinging to familiar
goals and familiar irritations. He is intoxicated with his safe,
self-contained, familiar world and so fixes his attention on
familiar goals and pursues them with unswerving and stub-
born determination. Thus the Animal Realm is symbolized
by the pig. A pig just eats whatever comes in front of its nose.
It does not look right or left; it just goes right through, just

The Six Realms 141

does it. It does not matter to the pig if it has to swim through
a tremendous mud pool or face other obstacles; it just plows
through and eats whatever appears in front of it.

But eventually the monkey begins to realize that he can
pick and choose his pleasures and pains. He begins to become
somewhat more intelligent, discriminating between pleasurable
and painful experiences in an effort to maximize pleasure and
minimize pain. This is the Human Realm, the realm of dis-
criminating passion. Here the monkey stops to consider what
it is that he is reaching for. He becomes more discriminating,
considers alternatives, thinks more, and therefore hopes and
fears more. This is the Human Realm, the realm of passion
and intellect. The monkey becomes more intelligent. He does
not simply grasp; he explores, feels textures, compares things.
If he decides that he wants something, he tries to grasp it,
draw it to him and possess it. For example, if the monkey
were to want a beautiful silk material, he would go to dif-
ferent shops and feel the texture of their materials to see if
any one of them was exactly what he wanted. When he came
to the material which precisely fit his preconception, or the
nearest thing to it, he would feel it and say, "Ah, that's right.
Isn't it beautiful? I think it's worth buying." Then he would
pay for it and take it home and show it to his friends and ask
them to feel it and appreciate the texture of his beautiful
material. In the Human Realm the monkey is always thinking
about how to possess pleasurable things: "Maybe I should
buy a teddy bear to take to bed — something lovable, cuddly,
soft, warm and hairy."

But the monkey discovers that, although he is intelligent
and can manipulate his world to achieve some pleasure, still
he cannot hold on to pleasure nor can he always get what he

142 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

wants. He is plagued by illness, old age, death — by frustra-
tions and problems of all kinds. Pain is the constant com-
panion of his pleasures.

So he begins, quite logically, to deduce the possibility of
heaven, the complete elimination of pain and achievement of
pleasure. His version of heaven may be the acquisition of
extreme wealth or power or fame — whatever it is he would
like his world to be, and he becomes preoccupied with achieve-
ment and competition. This is the Asura Realm, the Realm
of the Jealous Gods. The monkey dreams of ideal states that
are superior to the pleasures and pains of the Human Realm
and is always trying to achieve these states, always trying to
be better than anyone else. In his constant struggle to achieve
perfection of some sort, the monkey becomes obsessed with
measuring his progress, with comparing himself to others.
Through developing increased control of his thoughts and
emotions and therefore greater concentration, he is able to
manipulate his world more successfully than in the Human
Realm. But his preoccupation with always being best, with
always being master of a situation, makes him insecure and
anxious. He must always struggle to control his territory,
overcoming all threats to his achievements. He is always fight-
ing for mastery of his world.

The ambition to gain victory and the fear of losing a battle
provide a sense of being alive as well as cause irritation. The
monkey constantly loses sight of his ultimate goal, but is still
driven on by his ambition to be better. He is obsessed with
competition and achievement. He seeks out pleasurable, ap-
pealing situations that seem beyond his reach and tries to
draw them into his territory. When it is too difficult to achieve
his goals, he may shy away from the struggle and condemn
himself for not disciplining himself, for not working harder.

The Six Realms 143

So the monkey is caught in a world of unfulfilled ideals, self-
condemnation and fear of failure.

Eventually the monkey may achieve his goal — become a
millionaire, leader of a country, famous artist. At first, upon
achieving his goal, he will still feel somewhat insecure; but
sooner or later he begins to realize that he has made it, that
he is there, that he is in heaven. Then he begins to relax, to
appreciate and dwell upon his achievements, shielding out
undesirable things. It is an hypnotic-like state, natural con-
centration. This blissful and proud state is the Deva Loka or
Realm of the Gods. Figuratively, the bodies of the gods are
made out of light. They do not have to bother with earth-
bound concerns. If they want to make love, just glancing and
smiling at each other satisfies them. If they want to eat, they
just direct their minds toward beautiful sights which feed
them. It is the Utopian world which human beings expect it
to be. Everything happens easily, naturally, automatically.
Whatever the monkey hears is musical, whatever he sees is
colorful, whatever he feels is pleasant. He has achieved a
kind of self-hypnosis, a natural state of concentration which
blocks out of his mind everything he might find irritating or
undesirable.

Then the monkey discovers that he can go beyond the
sensual pleasures and beauties of the God Realm and enter
into the dhyana or concentration states of the Realm of the
Formless Gods, which is the ultimate refinement of the Six
Realms. He realizes that he can achieve {)urely mental plea-
sure, the most subtle and durable of all, that he is able to
maintain his sense of a solid self continuously by expanding
the walls of his prison to seemingly include the whole cosmos,
thereby conquering change and death. First he dwells upon
the idea of limitless space. He watches limitless space; he is

144 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

here and limitless space is there and he watches it. He im-
poses his preconception on the world, creates limitless space,
and feeds himself with this experience. Then the next stage
is concentration upon the idea of limitless consciousness. Here
one does not dwell on limitless space alone, but one also dwells
upon the intelligence which perceives that limitless space as
well. So ego watches limitless space and consciousness from
its central headquarters. The empire of ego is completely
extended, even the central authority cannot imagine how far
its territory extends. Ego becomes a huge, gigantic beast.

Ego has extended itself so far that it begins to lose track
of the boundary of its territory. Wherever it tries to define
its boundary, it seems to exclude part of its territory. Finally,
it concludes that there is no way of defining its boundaries.
The size of its empire cannot be conceived or imagined. Since
it includes everything, it cannot be defined as this or that.
So the ego dwells on the idea of not this and not that, the idea
that it cannot conceive or imagine itself. But finally even this
state of mind is surpassed when the ego realizes that the idea
that it is inconceivable and unimaginable is in itself a con-
ception. So the ego dwells on the idea of not not this, and not
not that. This idea of the impossibility of asserting anything is
something which ego feeds on, takes pride in, identifies with
and therefore uses to maintain its continuity. This is the
highest level of concentration and achievement that confused,
samsaric mind can attain.

The monkey has managed to reach the ultimate level of
achievement; but he has not transcended the dualistic logic
upon which achievement depends. The walls of the monkey's
house are still solid, still have the quality of "other" in a
subtle sense. The monkey may have achieved a temporary
harmony and peace and bliss through a seeming union with.

The Six Realms

145

his projections; but the whole thing is subtly fixed, a closed
world. He has become as solid as the walls, has achieved the
state of Egohood. He is still preoccupied with securing and
enhancing himself, still caught up in fixed ideas and concepts
about the world and himself, still taking the fantasies of the
fifth skandha seriously. Since his state of consciousness is
based on concentration, on dwelling upon other, he must con-
tinually check and maintain his achievement. "What a relief
to be here in the Realm of the Gods. I finally made it. I have
really got it now. But wait a minute . . . Have I really made
it? Ah, there it is. Yes, I've made it. / have made it." The
monkey thinks that he has achieved nirvana, but actually he
has achieved only a temporary state of Egohood.

Sooner or later the absorption wears out and the monkey
begins to panic. He feels threatened, confused, vulnerable
and plunges into the Realm of the Jealous Gods. But the
anxiety and envy of the Realm of the Jealous Gods is over-
powering and the monkey becomes preoccupied with figuring
out what has gone wrong. So he returns to the Human Realm.
But the Human Realm is very painful as well: the continual
effort to figure out what is happening, what has gone wrong,
just increases the pain and confusion. So the monkey escapes
the hesitation and critical perspective of the human intellect
and plunges into the animal realm where he just plods along,
ignoring what is around him, playing deaf and dumb to
messages that might challenge the security of following nar-
row, familiar ways. But messages from the environment break
through and a hunger for something more develops. Nostalgia
for the God. Realm becomes very strong and the intensity of
the struggle to go back to it increases. The monkey fantasizes
enjoying the pleasures of the God Realm. But the satisfaction
derived from the fantasy of fulfilling his hunger is brief and

146 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

he quickly finds himself hungry again. The hunger goes on
and on, until finally he is overwhelmed by the frustration of
his recurring hunger and plunges into a still more intense
struggle to fulfill his desires. The monkey's aggression is so
intense that the environment around him responds with equal
aggression and an atmosphere of heat and claustrophobia
develops. The monkey finds himself back in Hell. He has
managed to make a full circle from hell to heaven and back
again. This perpetual cycle of struggle, achievement, disil-
lusionment and pain is the circle of samsara, the karmic chain
reaction of dualistic fixation.

How can the monkey get out of this seemingly endless,
self-contained cycle of imprisonment? It is in the Human
Realm that the possibility of breaking the karmic chain or
the circle of samsara, arises. The intellect of the Human
Realm and the possibility of discriminating action allows
room to question the whole process of struggle. There is a
possibility for the monkey to question the obsession of re-
lating to something, of getting something, to question the
solidity of the worlds that he experiences. To do this, the
monkey needs to develop panoramic awareness and transcen-
dental knowledge. Panoramic awareness allows the monkey
to see the space in which the struggle occurs so that he can
begin to see its ironical and humorous quality. Instead of
simply struggling, he begins to experience the struggle and
see its futility. He laughs through the hallucinations. He dis-
covers that when he does not fight the walls, they are not
repulsive and hard but are actually warm, soft and penetrable.
He finds that he does not have to leap from the five windows
or break down the walls or even dwell upon them ; he can step
through them anywhere. That is why compassion or karuna

The Six Realms 147

is described as "soft and noble heart." It is a communication
process that is soft, open and warm.

The clarity and precision of transcendental knowledge al-
lows the monkey to see the walls in a different way. He begins
to realize that the world was never outside of himself, that it
was his own dualistic attitude, the separation of "I" and
"other," that created the problem. He begins to understand
that he himself is making the walls solid, that he is imprison-
ing himself through his ambition. And so he begins to realize
that to be free of his prison he must give up his ambition to
escape and accept the walls as they are.

Q : What if you never really felt that you had to struggle —
you have never reached the point of wanting to get out of the
house? Perhaps you are a bit afraid of what is outside the
walls, so you use them as protection.

A: Somehow, if you are able to establish friendly terms
with the walls, then there are no more walls, as such. Much
as you would like to have the walls for protection, the walls
will not be there anymore. It is very paradoxical that, the
more you dislike the wall, the stronger and thicker the wall
becomes, and the more you make friends with the wall, the
more the wall disappears.

Q: I wonder if pain and pleasure are on the same footing
as this intellectual discrimination between good and bad or
right and wrong. Is this discrimination due to a subjective
attitude?

A: I think pleasure and pain are born in the same kind of
background. Generally people regard pain as bad and plea-
sure as good, so much so that pleasure is regarded as joy and

148 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

spiritual bliss, and is connected with heaven, while pain is
associated with hell. So if one is able to see the absurdity
and irony of trying to achieve pleasure by rejecting pain,
fearing extreme pain and so striving toward pleasure, it is
all very funny. There is some lacking of a sense of humor in
people's attitudes toward pleasure and pain.

Q: You stated earlier that we hallucinate the phenomenal
world and want to break out of it. I understand the Buddhist
teaching to say that the phenomenal world is simply the mani-
festation of emptiness, so what would there be to break out of?
A: The point is that in the perception of ego the phenomenal
world is very real, overwhelming, solid. It may in fact be
hallucinatory, but as far as the monkey is concerned the hal-
lucination is quite real and solid. From his confused point
of view even thought becomes very solid and tangible. It is
not good enough to say that these hallucinations do not exist
because form is emptiness and emptiness is form. Try telling
that to a neurotic monkey. As far as he is concerned, form
exists as solid and heavy form. It is real to him because he is
so obsessed with it that he does not allow any space to see
otherwise. He is too busy continuously trying to reinforce his
own existence. He never allows a gap. Thus there is no room
for inspiration, no room to see other aspects, different angles
of the situation. From the monkey's point of view the con-
fusion is real. When you have a nightmare, at that moment it
is real, terribly frightening. On the other hand, when you
look back at' the experience, it seems merely to have been a
dream. You cannot use two different kinds of logic simul-
taneously. You have to see the confused aspect completely
in order to see through it, to see the absurdity of it.

The Four Noble Truths

Having painted a colorful picture of the monkey with his
many qualities — inquisitive, passionate, aggressive, and so
on — we could at this point examine the details of how he
might deal with his predicament.

One comes to an understanding and transcendence of ego
by using meditation to work backwards through the Five
Skandhas. And the last development of the Fifth Skandha
is the neurotic and irregular thought patterns which constantly
flit across the mind. Many different kinds of thoughts develop
along with the monkey's hallucinating of the Six Realms:
discursive thoughts, grasshopper-like thoughts, display-like
thoughts, filmshow-like thoughts, etc. It is from this point of
confusion that we must start; and in order to clarify the con-
fusion it would be helpful to examine the ideas of the Four
Noble Truths which constitute the first turning of the "Wheel
of Dharma" by the Buddha.

The Four Noble Truths are: the truth of suffering, the
truth of the origin of suffering, the truth of the goal, and the
truth of the path. We start with the truth of suffering, which
means that we must begin with the monkey's confusion and
insanity.

We must begin to see the actuality of duhkha, a Sanskrit

152 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

word which means "suffering," "dissatisfaction," or "pain."
Dissatisfaction occurs because the mind spins around in such
a way that there seems to be no beginning and no end to its
motion. Thought processes continue on and on: thoughts of
the past, thoughts of the future, thoughts of the present mo-
ment. This creates irritation. Thoughts are prompted by and
are also identical with dissatisfaction, duhkha, the constantly
repeated feeling that something is lacking, incomplete in our
lives. Somehow, something is not quite right, not quite enough.
So we are always trying to fill the gap, to make things right,
to find that extra bit of pleasure or security. The continuing
action of struggle and preoccupation is very irritating and
painful. Eventually, one begins to become irritated by just
being "me."

So to understand the truth of duhkha is actually to under-
stand mind's neurosis. We are driven here and there with so
much energy. Whether we eat, sleep, work, play, whatever we
do, life contains duhkha, dissatisfaction, pain. If we enjoy
pleasure, we are afraid to lose it; we strive for more and
more pleasure or try to contain it. If we suffer in pain, we
want to escape it. We experience dissatisfaction all the time.
All activities contain dissatisfaction or pain, continuously.

Somehow we pattern life in a way that never allows us
enough time to actually taste its flavor. There is continual
busyness, continual searching for the next moment, a con-
tinual grasping quality to life. That is duhkha, the First Noble
Truth. Understanding and confronting suffering is the first
step.

Having become acutely aware of our dissatisfaction, we
begin to search for a reason for it, for the source of the dis-
satisfaction. By examining our thoughts and actions we
discover that we are continually struggling to maintain and

The Four Noble Truths 153

enhance ourselves. We realize that this struggle is the root
of suffering. So we seek an understanding of the process of
struggle: that is, of how ego develops and operates. This is
the Second Noble Truth, the truth of the origin of suffering.

As we discussed in the chapters dealing with spiritual ma-
terialism, many people make the mistake of thinking that,
since ego is the root of suffering, the goal of spirituality must
be to conquer and destroy ego. They struggle to eliminate
ego's heavy hand but, as we discovered earlier, that struggle
is merely another expression of ego. We go around and
around, trying to improve ourselves through struggle, until
we realize that the ambition to improve ourselves is itself the
problem. Insights come only when there are gaps in our strug-
gle, only when we stop trying to rid ourselves of thought,
when we cease siding with pious, good thoughts against bad,
impure thoughts, only when we allow ourselves simply to see
the nature of thought.

We begin to realize that there is a sane, awake quality
within us. In fact this quality manifests itself only in the
absence of struggle. So we discover the Third Noble Truth,
the truth of the goal: that is, non-striving. We need only drop
the eiiort to secure and solidify ourselves and the awakened
state is present. But we soon realize that just "letting go" is
only possible for short periods. We need some discipline to
bring us to "letting be." We must walk a spiritual path. Ego
must wear itself out like an old shoe, journeying from suffer-
ing to liberation.

So let us examine the spiritual path, the practice of medi-
tation, the Fourth Noble Truth. Meditation practice is not an
attempt to enter into a trance-like state of mind nor is it an
attempt to become preoccupied with a particular object. There
has developed, both in India and Tibet, a so-called system of

154 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

meditation which might be called "concentration." That is to
say that this practice of meditation is based on focusing the
mind on a particular point so as to be better able to control
the mind and concentrate. In such practice the student chooses
an object to look at, think about, or visualize and then focuses
his entire attention upon it. In so doing, he tends to develop
by force a certain kind of mental calm. I call this kind of
practice "mental gymnastics" because it does not attempt to
deal with the totality of any given life-situation. It is based
entirely on this or that, subject and object, rather than trans-
cending the dualistic view of life.

The practice of samadhi on the other hand does not involve
concentration. This is very important to realize. Concentra-
tion practices are largely ego-reinforcing, although not pur-
posely intended as such. Still, concentration is practiced with
a particular aim and object in mind, so we tend to become
centralized in the "heart." We set out to concentrate upon a
flower, stone or flame, and we gaze fixedly at the object, but
mentally we are going into the heart as much as possible. We
are trying to intensify the solid aspect of form, the qualities
of stability and stillness. In the long run such a practice could
be dangerous. Depending upon the intensity of the meditator's
will-power, we might become introverted in a way which is
too solemn, fixed and rigid. This sort of practice is not con-
ducive to openness and energy nor to a sense of humor. It is
too heavy and could easily become dogmatic, in the sense
that those who become involved in such practices think in
terms of imposing discipline upon themselves. We think it
necessary to be very serious and solemn. This produces a
competitive attitude in our thinking — the more we can render
our minds captive, the more successful we are — which is a
rather dogmatic, authoritarian approach. This way of think-

The Four Noble Truths 155

ing, always focused on the future, is habitual with ego: "I
would like to see such and such results. I have an idealized
theory or dream which I would like to put into eiiect." We
tend to live in the future, our view of life colored by the
expectation of achieving an ideal goal. Because of this ex-
pectation we miss the precision and openness and intelligence
of the present. We are fascinated, blinded and overwhelmed
by the idealized goal.

The competitive quality of ego can readily be seen in the
materialistic world in which we live. If you want to become
a millionaire, you first try to become a millionaire psycho-
logically. You start by having an image of yourself as a
millionaire and then work very hard towards that goal. You
push yourself in that direction, regardless of whether or not
you are able to achieve it. This approach creates a kind of
blindfold, rendering you insensitive to the present moment
because you are living too much in the future. One could take
the same mistaken approach to the practice of meditation.

Inasmuch as real meditation practice is a way to step out
of ego, the first point is not to focus yourself too much upon
the future attainment of the awakened state of mind. The
whole practice of meditation is essentially based upon the
situation of this present moment, here and now, and means
working with this situation, this present state of mind. Any
meditation practice concerned with transcending ego is focused
in the present moment. For this reason it is a very effective
way to live. If you are completely aware of your present state
of being and the situation around you, you cannot miss a
thing. We may use various meditation techniques to facilitate
this kind of awareness, but these techniques are simply a way
of stepping out of ego. Technique is like a toy given to a
child. When the child grows up, the toy is discarded. In the

156 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism.

meantime technique is necessary in order to develop patience
and to refrain from dreaming about the "spiritual experi-
ence." One's whole practice should be based on the relation-
ship between you and nowness.

You do not have to push yourself into the practice of medi-
tation but just let be. If you practice in this way, a feeling of
space and ventilation automatically comes, the expression of
the Buddha-nature or basic intelligence that is working its
way through confusion. Then you begin to find the under-
standing of the "truth of the path," the Fourth Noble Truth,
simplicity, such as the awareness of walking. First you be-
come aware of standing, then you are aware that your right
leg is lifting, swinging, touching, pressing; then the left leg
is lifting, swinging, touching, pressing. There are many, many
details of action involved in the simplicity and sharpness of
being in this very moment, here, now.

And it is the same with the practice of the awareness of
breathing. You become aware of the breath coming into your
nostrils, going out and finally dissolving into the atmosphere.
It is a very gradual and detailed process and acute precision
is involved with its simplicity. If an act is simple, then you
begin to realize its precision. One begins to realize that what-
ever we do in everyday life is beautiful and meaningful.

If you pour a cup of tea, you are aware of extending your
arm and touching your hand to the teapot, lifting it and pour-
ing the water. Finally the water touches your teacup and fills
it, and you stop pouring and put the teapot down precisely,
as in the Japanese tea ceremony. You become aware that each
precise movement has dignity. We have long forgotten that
activities can be simple and precise. Every act of our lives
can contain simplicity and precision and can thus have tre-
mendous beauty and dignity.

The Four Noble Truths

157

The process of communication can be beautiful, if we see
it in terms of simplicity and precision. Every pause made in
the process of speaking becomes a kind of punctuation. Speak,
allow space, speak, allow space. It does not have to be a
formal and solemn occasion necessarily, but it is beautiful
that you are not rushing, that you are not talking at tremen-
dous speed, raucously. We do not have to churn out informa-
tion and then stop suddenly with a feeling of let-down in
order to get a response from the other person. We could do
things in a dignified and proper way. Just allow space. Space
is as important in communicating to another person as talk-
ing. You do not have to overload the other person with words
and ideas and smiles all at once. You can allow space, smile,
say something, and then allow a gap, and then talk, and then
space, punctuation. Imagine if we wrote letters without any
punctuation. The communication would be very chaotic. You
do not have to be self-conscious and rigid about allowing
space; just feel the natural flow of it.

This practice of seeing the precision of situations at every
moment, through such methods as the awareness of walking,
is called shamatha (Pali: samatha) meditation. Shamatha
meditation is associated with the Hinayana Path or the "lesser
vehicle," the disciplined or narrow path. Shamatha means
"peacefulness." There is a story concerning the Buddha which
relates how he taught a village woman to develop such mind-
fulness in the act of drawing water from a well. He taught her
to be aware of the precise movement of her hands and arms
as she drew up the water. Such practice is the attempt to see
the newness quality in action, which is why it is known as
"shamatha," the development of peace. When you see the
nowness of the very moment, there is no room for anything
but openness and peace.

158 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

Q: Could you say something more about allowing gaps to
appear? I understand what you mean, but I do not understand
how they come about, how someone allows a gap. How does
one "let be?"

A: Actually this question leads into the next topic, the dis-
cussion of the Bodhisattva Path, the Mahayana Path of com-
passion and freedom, the wide path. However, to answer the
question from the Hinayana point of view of simplicity, one
should be completely satisfied with whatever situation arises
and not look for entertainment from an external source. Gen-
erally, when we speak, we do not simply want to communi-
cate to the other person, but we want a response as well. We
want to be fed by the other person, which is a very egocentric
way of communicating. We have to give up this desire to be
fed, and then the gap automatically comes. We cannot pro-
duce the gap through effort.

Q: You said we have to prepare ourselves to enter the path.
We cannot rush into it. We have to pause. Could you speak a
bit more about this preparation?

A: In the beginning we have the feeling that the spiritual
search is something very beautiful, something that will answer
all our questions. We must go beyond this kind of hope and
expectation. We might expect our teacher to solve all our prob-
lems, relieve all our doubts. But when we confront our teacher,
he does not actually answer every question. He leaves many
things for us to work out ourselves, which is a tremendous let-
down and disappointment for us.

We have many expectations, especially if we seek a spiri-
tual path and involve ourselves with spiritual materialism.
We have the expectation that spirituality will bring us happi-
ness and comfort, wisdom and salvation. This literal, ego-

The Four Noble Truths

159

centric way of regarding spirituality must be turned com-
pletely upside down. Finally, if we give up all hope of attain-
ing any sort of enlightenment, then at that moment the path
begins to open. It is like the situation of waiting for someone
to arrive. You are about to give up all hope that he will ever
come, you have begun to think that the notion of his arrival
was simply a fantasy on your part, that he was never coming
in the first place. The moment you give up hope, the person
turns up. The spiritual path works in this way. It is a matter of
wearing out all expectation. Patience is necessary. You do not
have to push yourself too energetically into the path but just
wait, just allow some space, do not be too busy trying to under-
stand "reality." It is necessary first to see the motivation for
our spiritual search. Ambition is unnecessary if we are going
to start our path open-mindedly, with a mind that transcends
both "good" and "bad."

A tremendous hunger for knowledge develops when we be-
gin to realize the origin of duhkha. There will be a tremendous
push to get beyond it. If we push ourselves too much, then the
path of spirituality becomes instead the path of pain, con-
fusion, and samsara, because we are very busy trying to save
ourselves. We are too keen to learn something, too busy attend-
ing to our ambition to progress on the path rather than letting
ourselves be and examining the whole process before we start.
It is necessary not to rush onto the spiritual path but to pre-
pare ourselves properly and thoroughly. Just wait. Wait and
examine the whole process of the "spiritual search." Allow
some gap.

The main point is that we have this basic intelligence that
shines through our confusion. Consider the original analogy
of the monkey. He wanted to get out of his house and so be-
came very busy trying to escape, examining the walls and win-

160 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

dows, climbing up and down. The tremendous energy that
drives the monkey is the primeval intelligence which pushes
us outward. This intelligence is not like a seed which you must
nurture. It is like the sun that shines through gaps in the clouds.
When we allow a gap, then spontaneous, intuitive understand-
ing of how to proceed on the path suddenly, automatically
comes to us. This was the experience of the Buddha. After he
had studied numerous yogic disciplines under many Hindu
masters, he realized that he could not achieve a completely
awakened state simply by trying to apply these techniques. So
he stopped and decided to work on himself as he already was.
That is the basic instinct which is pushing its way through. It
is very necessary to acknowledge this basic instinct. It tells us
that we are not condemned people, that we are not funda-
mentally bad or lacking.

Q: How does one deal with practical life situations while
trying to be simple and experience space?
A: You see, in order to experience open space one also must
experience the solidity of earth, of form. They are interde-
pendent. Often we romanticize open space and then we fall
into traps. As long as we do not romanticize open space as a
wondrous place but rather relate that space to earth, then we
will avoid these traps. Space cannot be experienced without
the outline of the earth to define it. If we are going to paint a
picture of open space, we must express it in terms of the
earth's horizon. So it is necessary to bring oneself back to the
problems of everyday life, the kitchen-sink problems. That is
why the simplicity and precision of everyday activitives is
very important. If you perceive open space, you should bring
yourself back to your old, familiar, claustrophobic life-situa-
tions and look into them more closely, examine them, absorb

The Four Noble Truths 161

yourself into them, until the absurdity of their solidity strikes
you and you can see their spaciousness as well.

Q: How does one relate to the impatience that accompanies
the waiting period?

A: Impatience means that you do not have a complete under-
standing of the process. If you see the completeness of each
action, then you will not be impatient any more.

Q: I experience calm thoughts as well as neurotic thoughts.
Are these calm thoughts something I should cultivate?
A: In the practice of meditation all thoughts are the same:
pious thoughts, very beautiful thoughts, religious thoughts,
calm thoughts — they are all still thoughts. You do not try to
cultivate calm thoughts and suppress so-called neurotic
thoughts. This is an interesting point. When we speak of tread-
ing the path of the dharma, which is the Fourth Noble Truth,
it does not mean that we become religious, calm, good. Trying
to be calm, trying to be good, is also an aspect of striving, of
neuroticism. Religiously inclined thoughts are the watcher,
the judge, and confused, worldly thoughts are the actor, the
doer. For instance if you meditate, you might experience ordi-
nary domestic thoughts and at the same time there is a watcher
saying, "You shouldn't do this, you shouldn't do that, but you
should come back to meditation." These pious thoughts are
still thoughts and should not be cultivated.

Q: Could you say something more about using pauses as
well as speech to communicate, and how this process relates
to ego?

A: Usually, when we communicate with another person, we
are driven by a kind of neurotic speed. We must begin to allow

162 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

some spontaneity to penetrate this speed so that we do not
push ourselves onto the person with whom we are communi-
cating, do not impose ourselves, do not overload the other
person. In particular, when we speak of something in which
we are very interested, we do not just talk but we leap at the
other person. Spontaneity is always there, but it is clouded
over by thought. Whenever there is a gap in the cloudbank of
thought, it shines through. Reach out and acknowledge that
first openness and through that opening the basic intelligence
will begin to function.

Q: Many people are aware of the truth of suffering but do
not move on to the second step, awareness of the origin of
suffering. Why is that?

A: I think that it is largely a matter of paranoia. We want
to escape. We want to run away from pain rather than regard
it as a source of inspiration. We feel the suffering to be bad
enough, so why investigate it further? Some people who suffer
a great deal and realize that they cannot escape their suifering
really begin to understand it. But most people are too busy
attempting to rid themselves of irritation, too busy seeking
distractions from themselves to look into the material they al-
ready have. It is too embarrassing to look into it. This is the
attitude of paranoia: if you look too closely, you will find
something fearful. But in order to be a completely inspired
person like Gautama Buddha, you have to be very open-
minded and intelligent, an inquisitive person. You have to
want to explore everything, even though it may be ugly, pain-
ful or repulsive. This kind of scientific-mindedness is very im-
portant.

In the awakened mind, where does motivation come in?

The Four Noble Truths 163

A: Inspired motivation comes from something beyond '
thought, something beyond the conceptualized ideas of "good"
and "bad," "desirable" and "undesirable." Beyond thought
there is a kind of intelligence which is our basic nature, our
background, an intuitive primordial intelligence, a feeling of
space, a creative open way of dealing with situations. This
kind of motivation is not intellectual: it is intuitive, precise.

Q: Can one work on one's mind by controlling the physical
situation?

A: Whatever you do with the situations of life, there is al-
ways a communication going on between mind and matter. But
one cannot rely upon the gadgetry of matter alone; you can-
not get around the problems of mind by manipulating things
external to it. We see so many people in our society trying to
do just this. People put on robes and renounce the world and
lead very austere lives, renouncing every common habit of
human behavior. But eventually they will have to deal with
their confused minds. Confusion originates in mind, so one
has to start directly with mind rather than attempting to go
around it. If one is trying to get around mental confusion by
manipulating the physical world, then I do not think it will
work.

In the dance of life, matter reflects mind and mind reacts
to matter. There is a continual exchange. If one is holding a
lump of rock, one should feel the solid earth qualities of rock.
One has to learn how to communicate with the rocklike quality.
If one is holding a flower, then the particular shape and color
of the petals connect to our psychology as well. We cannot
completely ignore the symbolism of the external world.

However, in the beginning as we attempt to confront our
own neuroses, we must be very direct and not think that we

164 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

can evade the problems of mind by playing with matter. For
instance, if a person is psychologically unbalanced, com-
pletely confused, like the monkey we have been discussing,
and if we dress him in the robes of the Buddha or sit him in
a meditation posture, his mind will still spin around in the
same way. But later on, when he learns to settle himself down
and becomes a simple monkey, then there might be a certain
effectiveness in taking him into a quiet place or retreat.

Q: When I see the ugliness in myself, I do not know how to
accept it. I try to avoid it or change it rather than accept it.
A: Well, you do not have to hide it. You do not have to
change it. Investigate it further. When you see the ugliness in
yourself, that is just a preconception. You see it as ugliness,
which is still connected with the ideas of "good" and "bad."
But you have to transcend even those words, "good" and
"bad." You have to get beyond words and conceptualized
ideas and just get into what you are, deeper and deeper. The
first glimpse is not quite enough: you have to examine the
details without judging, without using words and concepts.
Opening to oneself fully is opening to the world.

The Bodliisattva Path

We have discussed the Hinayana meditation practice of sim-
plicity and precision. By allowing a gap, space in which things
may be as they are, we begin to appreciate the clear simplicity
and precision of our lives. This is the beginning of meditation
practice. We begin to penetrate the Fifth Skanda, cutting
through the busyness and speed of discursive thought, the
cloud of "gossip" that fills our minds. The next step is to work
with emotions.

Discursive thought might be compared to the blood circu-
lation which constantly feeds the muscles of our system, the
emotions. Thoughts link and sustain the emotions so that, as
we go about our daily lives, we experience an ongoing flow
of mental gossip punctuated by more colorful and intense
bursts of emotion. The thoughts and emotions express our
basic attitudes toward and ways of relating to the world and
form an environment, a fantasy realm in which we live. These
"environments" are the Six Realms, and although one particu-
lar realm may typify the psychology of a particular indi-
vidual, still that person will constantly experience the emo-
tions connected with the other realms as well.

In order to work with these realms we must begin to view
situations in a more panoramic way, which is vipashjana

168 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

(Pali: vipassana) meditation. We must become aware not
only of the precise details of an activity, but also of the situa-
tion as a whole. Vipashyana involves awareness of space, the
atmosphere in which precision occurs. If we see the precise
details of our activity, this awareness also creates a certain
space. Being aware of a situation on a small scale also brings
awareness on a larger scale. Out of this develops panoramic
awareness, mahavip ashy ana (Pali: mahavipassana) medita-
tion: that is, awareness of the overall pattern rather than the
focusing of attention upon details. We begin to see the pattern
of our fantasies rather than being immersed in them. We dis-
cover that we need not struggle with our projections, that the
wall that separates us from them is our own creation. The in-
sight into the insubstantial nature of ego is prajna, transcen-
dental knowledge. As we glimpse prajna we relax, realizing
that we no longer have to maintain the existence of ego. We
can alford to be open and generous. Seeing another way of
dealing with our projections brings intense joy. This is the
first spiritual level of attainment of the bodhisattva, the first
bhumi. We enter the Bodhisattva Path, the Mahayana Path,
the open way, the path of warmth and openness.

In mahavipashyana meditation there is a vast expanse of
space between us and objects. We are aware of the space be-
tween the situation and ourselves and anything can happen in
that space. Nothing is happening here or there in terms of re-
lationship or battle. In other words, we are not imposing our
conceptualized ideas, names and categories on experience, but
we feel the openness of space in every situation. In this way
awareness becomes very precise and all-encompassing.

Mahavipashyana meditation means allowing things to be as
they are. We begin to realize that this needs no effort on our
part because things are as they are. We do not have to look

The Bodhisattva Path 169

at them in that way: they are that way. And so we begin to
really appreciate openness and space, that we have space in
which to move about, that we do not have to try to be aware
because we already are aware. So the Mahayana Path is the
open way, the wide path. It involves the open-minded willing-
ness to allow oneself to be awake, to allow one's instinct to
spring out.

Previously we discussed allowing space in order to com-
municate, but that kind of practice is very deliberate and self-
conscious. When we practice mahavipashyana meditation, we
do not simply watch ourselves communicate, deliberately al-
lowing a gap, deliberately waiting; but we communicate and
then just space out, so to speak. Let be and not care anymore;
don't possess the letting be as belonging to you, as your crea-
tion. Open, let be and disown. Then the spontaneity of the
awakened state springs out.

The Mahayana scriptures speak of those who are completely
ready to open, those who are just about ready to open and
those who have the potential to open. Those who have the po-
tential are intellectual people who are interested in the sub-
ject but who do not allow enough room for this instinct to
spring out. Those who are almost ready are quite open-
minded, but they are watching themselves more than neces-
sary. Those who are completely ready to open have heard the
secret word, the password of tathagata: someone has already
done it, somebody has already crossed over, it is the open
path, it is possible, it is the tathagata path. Therefore, disre-
garding how or when or why, simply open. It is a beautiful
thing, it has already happened to someone else, why not to
you? Why do you discriminate between "me" and the rest of
the tathagatas?

"Tathagata" means "those who have experienced the tatha-

170 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

ta," which is, "as it is": those who have experienced "as it is."
In other words, the idea of tathagata is a way of inspiration,
a starting point; it tells us that other people have already made
it, that others have already experienced it. This instinct has
already inspired someone, the instinct of "awake," of open-
ness, of coolness in the sense of intelligence.

The path of the bodhisattva is for those who are brave and
convinced of the powerful reality of the tathagata-nature
which exists within themselves. Those actually awakened by
such an idea as "tathagata" are on the Bodhisattva Path, the
path of the brave warrior who trusts in his potential to com-
plete the journey, who trusts in the Buddha-nature. The word
"bodhisattva" means: "he who is brave enough to walk on
the path of the bodhi." "Bodhi" means "awake," "the
awakened state." This is not to say that the bodhisattva must
already be fully awake; but he is willing to walk the path of
the awakened ones.

This path consists of six transcendental activities which take
place spontaneously. They are: transcendental generosity, dis-
cipline, patience, energy, meditation and knowledge. These
virtues are called "the six paramitas," because "param"
means "other side" or "shore," "other side of the river," and
"ita" means "arrived." "Paramita" means "arriving at the
other side or shore," which indicates that the activities of the
bodhisattva must have the vision, the understanding which
transcends the centralized notions of ego. The bodhisattva is
not trying to be good or kind, but he is spontaneously com-
passionate.

Generosity

Transcendental generosity is generally misunderstood in the
study of the Buddhist scriptures as meaning being kind to

The Bodhisattva Path 171

someone who is lower than you. Someone has this pain and
suffering and you are in a superior position and can save
them — which is a very simple-minded way of looking down
upon someone. But in the case of the bodhisattva, generosity
is not so callous. It is something very strong and powerful;
it is communication.

Communication must transcend irritation, otherwise it will
be like trying to make a comfortable bed in a briar patch. The
penetrating qualities of external color, energy, and light will
come toward us, penetrating our attempts to communicate like
a thorn pricking our skin. We will wish to subdue this intense
irritation and our communication will be blocked.

Communication must be radiation and receiving and ex-
change. Whenever irritation is involved, then we are not able
to see properly and fully and clearly the spacious quality of
that which is coming toward us, that which is presenting itself
as communication. The external world is immediately rejected
by our irritation which says, "No, no, this irritates me, go
away." Such an attitude is the complete opposite of trans-
cendental generosity.

So the bodhisattva must experience the complete communi-
cation of generosity, transcending irritation and self-defen-
siveness. Otherwise, when thorns threaten to prick us, we feel
that we are being attacked, that we must defend ourselves. We
run away from the tremendous opportunity for communica-
tion that has been given to us, and we have not been brave
enough even to look to the other shore of the river. We are
looking back and trying to run away.

Generosity is a willingness to give, to open without philo-
sophical or pious or religious motives, just simply doing what
is required at any moment in any situation, not being afraid
to receive anything. Opening could take place in the middle

172 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

of a highway. We are not afraid that smog and dust or people's
hatreds and passions will overwhelm us ; we simply open, com-
pletely surrender, give. This means that we do not judge, do
not evaluate. If we attempt to judge or evaluate our experi-
ence, if we try to decide to what extent we should open, to
what extent we should remain closed, then openness will have
no meaning at all and the idea of paramita, of transcendental
generosity, will be in vain. Our action will not transcend any-
thing, will cease to be the act of a bodhisattva.

The whole implication of the idea of transcendence is that
we see through the limited notions, the limited conceptions,
the warfare mentality of this as opposed to that. Generally,
when we look at an object, we do not allow ourselves to see
it properly. Automatically we see our version of the object in-
stead of actually seeing that object as it is. Then we are quite
satisfied, because we have manufactured our own version of
the thing within ourselves. Then we comment on it, we judge,
we take or reject; but there is no real communication going
on at all.

So transcendental generosity is giving whatever you have.
Your action must be completely open, completely naked. It
is not for you to make judgments; it is for the recipients to
make the gesture of receiving. If the recipients are not ready
for your generosity, they will not receive it. If they are ready
for it, they will come and take it. This is the selfless action of
the bodhisattva. He is not self-conscious: "Am I making any
mistakes?"; "Am I being careful?"; "To whom should I
open?" He never takes sides. The bodhisattva will, figura-
tively just lie like a corpse. Let people look at you and ex-
amine you. You are at their disposal. Such noble action, such
complete action, action that does not contain any hypocrisy,

The Bodhisattva Path 173

any philosophical or religious judgment at all. That is why it
is transcendental. That is why it is paramita. It is beautiful.

Discipline

And if we proceed further and examine the paramita of "mo-
rality" or "discipline," the shila paramita, we find that the
same principles apply. That is, shila or discipline is not a
matter of binding oneself to a fixed set of laws or patterns. For
if a bodhisattva is completely selfless, a completely open per-
son, then he will act according to openness, will not have to
follow rules; he will simply fall into patterns. It is impossible
for the bodhisattva to destroy or harm other people, because
he embodies transcendental generosity. He has opened himself
completely and so does not discriminate between this and that.
He just acts in accordance with what is. From another person's
point of view — if someone were observing the bodhisattva —
he always appears to act correctly, always seems to do the
right thing at the right time. But if we were to try to imitate
him, it would be impossible to do so, because his mind is so
precise, so accurate that he never makes mistakes. He never
runs into unexpected problems, never creates chaos in a de-
structive way. He just falls into patterns. Even if life seems
to be chaotic, he just falls in, participates in the chaos and
somehow things sort themselves out. The bodhisattva is able
to cross the river so to speak, without falling into its turbu-
lence.

If we are completely open, not watching ourselves at all,
but being completely open and communicating with situations
as they are, then action is pure, absolute, superior. However,
if we attempt to achieve pure conduct through effort, our ac-
tion will be clumsy. However pure it may be, still there will

174 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

be clumsiness and rigidity involved. In the case of the bodhi-
sattva his whole action is flowing, there is no rigidity at all.
Everything just fits into place, as if someone had taken years
and years to figure out the whole situation. The bodhisattva
does not act in a premeditated way; he just communicates. He
starts from the generosity of openness and falls into the pat-
tern of the situation. It is an often-used metaphor that the
bodhisattva's conduct is like the walk of an elephant. Ele-
phants do not hurry; they just walk slowly and surely through
the jungle, one step after another. They just sail right along.
They never fall nor do they make mistakes. Each step they
take is solid and definite.

Patience

The next act of the bodhisattva is patience. Actually you can-
not really divide the six activities of the bodhisattva into
strictly separate practices. One leads into and embodies the
next. So in the case of the paramita of patience, this action is
not a matter of trying to control oneself, trying to become a
hard worker, trying to be an extremely forebearing person,
disregarding one's physical or mental weakness, going on and
on and on until one completely drops dead. But patience also
involves skillful means, as with discipline and generosity.

Transcendental patience never expects anything. Not ex-
pecting anything, we do not get impatient. However, generally
in our lives we expect a lot, we push ourselves, and this kind
of action is very much based on impulse. We find something
exciting and beautiful and we push ourselves very hard
towards it, and sooner or later we are pushed back. The more
we push forward, the more we will be pushed back, because
impulse is such a strong driving force without wisdom. The
action of impulse is like that of a person running without eyes

The Bodhisattva Path 175

to see, like that of a blind man trying to reach his destination.
But the action of the bodhisattva never provokes a reaction.
The bodhisattva can accommodate himself to any situation be-
cause he never desires or is fascinated by anything. The force
behind transcendental patience is not driven by premature im-
pulse nor by anything else of that nature. It is very slov^^ and
sure and continuous, like the walk of an elephant.

Patience also feels space. It never fears new situations, be-
cause nothing can surprise the bodhisattva — nothing. What-
ever comes — be it destructive, chaotic, creative, welcoming,
or inviting — the bodhisattva is never disturbed, never shocked,
because he is aware of the space between the situation and
himself. Once one is aware of the space between the situation
and oneself, then anything can happen in that space. What-
ever occurs does so in the midst of space. Nothing takes place
"here" or "there" in terms of relationship or battle. There-
fore transcendental patience means that we have a flowing
relationship with the world, that we do not fight anything.

Energy

And then we could go to the next stage, the paramita of ene'rgy,
virya, which is the kind of energy that immediately leads us
into situations so that we never miss a chance, never miss an
opportunity. In other words, it is joy, joyous energy, as Shanti-
deva points out in his Bodhisattva-charyavatara. This energy
is joy, rather than the kind of energy with which we work hard
because we feel we must. It is joyous energy because we are
completely interested in the creative patterns of our lives.
One's whole life is opened by generosity, activated by mo-
rality, strengthened by patience, and now one arrives at the
next stage, that of joy. One never sees situations as uninterest-
ing or stagnant at all, because the bodhisattva's view of life

176 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

is extremely open-minded, intensely interested. He never eval-
uates; though that does not mean that he becomes a complete
blank. It does not mean that he is absorbed into a "higher
consciousness," the "highest state of samadhi," so that he can-
not differentiate day from night or breakfast from lunch. It
does not mean he becomes vague or wooly-minded. Rather, he
actually sees verbalized and conceptualized values as they are,
and then he sees beyond concept and evaluation. He sees the
sameness of these little distinctions that we make. He sees
situations from a panoramic point of view and therefore takes
a great deal of interest in life as it is. So the bodhisattva does
not strive at all; he just lives.

He takes a vow when he enters the Bodhisattva Path that
he will not attain enlightenment until he has helped all sentient
beings to attain the awakened state of mind or Buddhahood
before him. Beginning with such a noble act of giving, of open-
ing, of sacrifice, he continues to follow this path, taking tre-
mendous interest in everyday situations, never tiring of work-
ing with life. This is virya, working hard with joy. There is
tremendous energy in realizing that we have given up trying
to become the Buddha, that now we have the time to really live
life, that we have gone beyond neurotic speed.

Interestingly, although the bodhisattva has taken a vow not
to attain enlightenment, because he is so precise and accurate,
he never wastes one second. He always lives life thoroughly
and fully, and the result is that, before he realizes where he
is, he has attained enlightenment. But his unwillingness to
attain enlightenment continues, strangely enough, even after
he has reached Buddhahood. Then compassion and wisdom
really burst out, reinforcing his energy and conviction. If we
never tire of situations, our energy is joyous. If we are com-

The Bodhisattva Path 177

pletely open, fully awake to life, there is never a dull moment.
This is virya.

Meditation

The next paramita is dhyana or meditation. There are two
types of dhyana. The first is that of the bodhisattva, where
because of his compassionate energy, he experiences continual
panoramic awareness. Dhyana literally means "awareness,"
being in a state of "awake." But this does not only mean the
practice of meditation in a formal sense. The Bodhisattva
never seeks a trance state, bliss, or absorption. He is simply
awake to life situations as they are. He is particularly aware
of the continuity of meditation with generosity, morality, pa-
tience and energy. There is a continual feeling of "awake."

The other type of dhyana is the concentration practice of the
realm of the gods. The main difference between that type of
meditation and the meditation of the bodhisattva is that the
bodhisattva does not dwell upon anything, although he deals
with actual physical life situations. He does not set up a cen-
tral authority in his meditation, does not watch himself acting
or meditating, so that his action is always meditation and his
meditation is always action.

Knowledge

The next paramita is prajna or "knowledge." Prajna is tra-
ditionally symbolized by a sharp, two-edged sword which cuts
through all confusion. Even if the bodhisattva has perfected
the other five paramitas, lacking prajna the other actions are
incomplete. It is said in the sutras that the five paramitas are
like five rivers flowing into the ocean of prajna. It also says
in the sutras that the chakravartin or universal emperor goes to

178 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism,

war at the head of four different armies. Without the emperor
to lead them, the armies have no direction. In other words,
prajna is the intelligence, the basic pattern into which all these
other virtues lead and dissolve. It is that which cuts through
the conceptualized versions of bodhisattva action — generosity,
discipline, and all the rest. The bodhisattva might perform his
actions methodically and properly, but without knowledge,
without the sword that cuts through doubt and hesitation his
action is not really transcendental at all. Thus prajna is intelli-
gence, the all-seeing eye, the opposite of the ego's watching
itself doing everything.

The bodhisattva transmutes the watcher or ego into dis-
criminating knowledge, prajna paramita. "Pra" means
"super," "jna" means "knowing": super-knowledge, com-
plete, accurate knowledge which sees everything. Conscious-
ness fixed on "this" and "that" has been cut through, which
produces the two-fold knowledge, the prajna of knowing and
the prajna of seeing.

The prajna of knowing deals with the emotions. It is the
cutting through of conflicting emotions — the attitudes that one
has toward oneself — thereby revealing what one is. The prajna
of seeing is the transcendence of primitive preconceptions of
the world. It is seeing situations as they are. Therefore the
prajna of seeing allows for dealing with situations in as bal-
anced a way as possible. Prajna completely cuts through any
kind of awareness which has the slightest inclination towards
separating "that" and "this." This is the reason why the blade
is two-edged. It does not just cut in this direction, but in that
one as well. The bodhisattva no longer experiences the irritat-
ing quality that comes from distinguishing between this and
that. He just sails through situations without needing to check
back. So all the six paramitas are interdependent.

The Bodhisattva Path 179

Q: Would you define meditation as simply paying attention
to what you're doing, as being mindful?

A: Dhyana, the fifth paramita, is just being aware, being
mindful. But dhyana or any of the other paramitas cannot
exist independently without transcendental knowledge, prajna.
Prajna throws the practice of awareness into a completely dif-
ferent light, transforms it into something more than simple
concentration, the one-pointed practice of keeping the mind
focused on a particular object or thing. With prajna, medita-
tion becomes awareness of the whole environment of the par-
ticular situation you are in. It also results in precision and
openness as well, so that you are aware of every moment,
every step, every movement you make. And this precision, this
simplicity expands into an overall awareness of the entire
situation. So meditation is not a matter of dwelling upon one
thing, but it means being awake to the whole situation, as well
as experiencing the simplicity of events. Meditation is not
merely awareness practice alone, because if you only practice
awareness, then you do not develop the intuitive insight neces-
sary to expand your practice. Then you have to shift awareness
from one subject to another.

Developing prajna is like learning to walk. You might have
to begin by developing awareness of just one thing and then
develop awareness of two things, and then three, four, five, six
and so on. But finally, if you are to walk properly, you must
learn to expand your awareness to include the entire situation
you are in so that there is one awareness of everything in the
same situation. In order to do this it is necessary not to dwell
on anything; then you are aware of everything.

Q: If you have conflicts with other people, making it diffi-
cult to relate to them, what do you do?

180 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

A: Well, if your desire to communicate, which is generosity,
is strong, then you have to apply prajna, knowledge, to dis-
cover why you are unable to communicate. Perhaps your com-
munication is only one-directional. Perhaps you are unwilling
for communication to come from the other direction as well.
Perhaps you have a great desire to communicate and put all
your energy into your communication. This is a very intense
approach, overwhelming for the person to whom you are com-
municating. They have no room to communicate back to you.
You do this with all good intentions, of course, but we have to
be careful to see the whole situation, rather than just being
keen to throw something at the other person. We must learn
to see from the other person's point of view as well. Essen-
tially, we have to provide some kind of space and openness.
The urge to convert the other person into our way of thinking
is quite difficult to resist; we often experience it. But we must
be careful that our communication doesn't become too heavy-
handed. And the only way to do this is by learning how to
provide space and openness.

Q: What makes us give up desire?

A: The discovery of the truth, the hard fact that you cannot
become a bodhisattva unless you give up wanting to become
anything. It is not a matter of playing games with yourself.
You simply have to surrender. You have to really open and
give up. Once you have had some glimpse of what it would be
like to surrender, then there is inspiration to go beyond that,
to go further. Once you have experienced a tiny glimpse of the
awakened state of mind, just a fraction-of-a-second glimpse,
there is tremendous desire and effort to proceed on the path.
And then one also realizes that in order to go further one must
give up altogether the idea of going. The Bodhisattva Path is

The Bodhisattva Path 181

divided into ten stages and five paths. At the end of the last
path, at the tenth stage, you have a sudden glimpse that you
are about to give birth to the awakened state of mind, that you
are just about to click into it, when something pulls you back.
Then you realize that the only thing holding you back is that
you have to give up trying. That is the vajra-like samadhi,
the death of desire.

Q: In normal life, not caring is associated with boredom. If,
as with the bodhisattva, one doesn't care, then will one be a
vegetable?

A: Not caring does not mean becoming a stone or jelly-fish;
there is still energy. But from the point of view of a person who
cares, if we experience desire or anger but do not act them
out and instead try to keep ourselves cool, if we do not put
our energy into action, we feel let down, cheated, stifled. This
is a one-sided view of energy.

Energy does not at all manifest itself purely in terms of
being destructive or possessive. There are further energies
which are not at all connected with love or hate. These are
the energies of precision, of clarity, of seeing through situa-
tions. There are energies of intelligence which arise contin-
uously and which we do not allow ourselves to experience
properly. We always regard energy in terms of being destruc-
tive or possessive. There is something more than that. There is
never a dull moment if you are actually in touch with reality
as it is. The spark of energy arises all the time which tran-
scends ignorance and the simple-minded one-directional way.

Q : But how does one know how and where to direct the en-
ergy?

182 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

A: Because you see situations very clearly, much more
clearly than you did before, because you see them as they
really are, you know how and where to direct the energy.
Previously you imposed your version of reality onto life,
rather than seeing things as they are. So when this kind of veil
is removed, you see the situation as it is. Then you can com-
municate with it properly and fully. You do not have to force
yourself to do anything at all. There is a continual exchange,
a continual dance. It is similar to the sun shining and plants
growing. The sun has no desire to create the vegetation; plants
simply react to sunlight and the situation develops naturally.

Q: Spontaneously?

A: Spontaneously. Therefore it is accurate, as in the case of
causing vegetables to grow; it is very scientific, right on the
point. So your actions become exceedingly accurate because
they are spontaneous.

Q: Do situations ever call for aggressive action?
A: I don't think so, because aggressive action is generally
connected with defending oneself. If the situation has the
quality of nowness, of precision, it never gets out of hand.
Then there is no need to control it, to defend oneself.

Q: I'm thinking of Christ chasing the money lenders out of
the temple.

A : I would not say that was aggressive action ; that was truth-
ful action, which is very beautiful. It occurred because he saw
the precision of the situation without watching himself or try-
ing to be heroic. We need action like that.

Q: How do we make the transition between a calm, passive

The Bodhisattva Path 183

state of mind that lets everything in and a more active, dis-
criminating state of mind?

A: I think the point is to look at it in a completely different
way. In fact I do not think our version of everyday life is as
precise and accurate and sharp as we generally think it is. Ac-
tually we are completely confused, because we don't do one
thing at a time. We do one thing and our mind is occupied with
a hundred other things, which is being terribly vague. We
should approach everyday life in a wholly different manner.
That is, we should allow the birth of an intuitive insight which
really sees things as they are. The insight at the beginning
might be rather vague, only a glimpse of what is, a very small
glimmer compared with the darkness of the confusion. But as
this kind of intelligence becomes more active and penetrating,
the vagueness begins to be pushed aside and dissolves.

Q: Doesn't seeing things as they are require an understand-
ing of the subject, the perceiver, as well as of the object?
A: Yes, that is an interesting point. Somehow you have to
be right in no-man's land in order to see things as they are.
Seeing things as they are requires a leap, and one can only
take this so-called leap without leaping from anywhere. If you
see from somewhere, you will be conscious of the distance and
conscious of the seer as well. So you can only see things as
they are in the midst of nowhere. Like one cannot taste one's
own tongue. Think about it.

Q: You speak of only being able to see things as they are
from the midst of nowhere. Yet the Buddhist scriptures talk of
crossing to the other shore of the river. Could you clarify this?
A: It is something of a paradox, like the idea of leaping
from nowhere. Certainly the Buddhist scriptures speak of

184 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

crossing to the other shore of the river. But you only arrive at
the other shore when you finally realize that there is no other
shore. In other words, we make a journey to the "promised
land," the other shore, and we have arrived when we realize
that we were there all along. It is very paradoxical.

Shunvata

Cutting through our conceptualized versions of the world with
the sword of prajna, we discover shunyata — nothingness,
emptiness, voidness, the absence of duality and conceptualiza-
tion. The best known of the Buddha's teachings on this subject
are presented in the Prajnaparamita-hridaya, also called the
Heart Sutra; but interestingly in this sutra the Buddha hardly
speaks a word at all. At the end of the discourse he merely
says, "Well said, well said," and smiles. He created a situa-
tion in which the teaching of shunyata was set forth by others,
rather than himself being the actual spokesman. He did not
impose his communication but created the situation in which
teaching could occur, in which his disciples were inspired to
discover and experience shunyata. There are twelve styles of
presenting the dharma and this is one of them.

This sutra tells of Avalokiteshvara, the bodhisattva who
represents compassion and skillful means, and Shariputra, the
great arhat who represents prajna, knowledge. There are cer-
tain differences between the Tibetan and Japanese translations
and the Sanskrit original, but all versions make the point that
Avalokiteshvara was compelled to awaken to shunyata by the
overwhelming force of prajna. Then Avalokiteshvara spoke
with Shariputra, who represents the scientific-minded person

188 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

or precise knowledge. The teachings of the Buddha were put
under Shariputra's microscope, which is to say that these
teachings were not accepted on blind faith but were examined,
practiced, tried and proved.

Avalokiteshvara said: "Oh Shariputra, form is empty,
emptiness is form; form is no other than emptiness, emptiness
is no other than form." We need not go into the details of
their discourse, but we can examine this statement about form
and emptiness, which is the main point of the sutra. And so
we should be very clear and precise about the meaning of
the term "form."

Form is that which is before we project our concepts onto
it. It is the original state of "what is here," the colorful, vivid,
impressive, dramatic, aesthetic qualities that exist in every
situation. Form could be a maple leaf falling from a tree and
landing on a mountain river; it could be full moonlight, a
gutter in the street or a garbage pile. These things are "what
is," and they are all in one sense the same: they are all forms,
they are all objects, they are just what is. Evaluations regard-
ing them are only created later in our minds. If we really look
at these things as they are, they are just forms.

So form is empty. But empty of what? Form is empty of
our preconceptions, empty of our judgments. If we do not
evaluate and categorize the maple leaf falling and landing on
the stream as opposed to the garbage heap in New York, then
they are there, what is. They are empty of preconception. They
are precisely what they are, of course! Garbage is garbage, a
maple leaf is a maple leaf, "what is" is "what is." Form is
empty if we see it in the absence of our own personal inter-
pretations of it.

But emptiness is also form. That is a very outrageous re-
mark. We thought we had managed to sort everything out, we

Shunyata 189

thought we had managed to see that everything is the "same"
if we take out our preconceptions. That made a beautiful pic-
ture: everything bad and everything good that we see are both
good. Fine. Very smooth. But the next point is that emptiness
is also form, so we have to re-examine. The emptiness of the
maple leaf is also form; it is not really empty. The emptiness
of the garbage heap is also form. To try to see these things as
empty is also to clothe them in concept. Form comes back. It
was too easy, taking away all concept, to conclude that every-
thing simply is what is. That could be an escape, another way
of comforting ourselves. We have to actually feel things as
they are, the qualities of the garbage heapness and the quali-
ties of the maple leainess, the isness of things. We have to feel
them properly, not just trying to put a veil of emptiness over
them. That does not help at all. We have to see the "isness"
of what is there, the raw and rugged qualities of things pre-
cisely as they are. This is a very accurate way of seeing the
world. So first we wipe away all our heavy preconceptions,
and then we even wipe away the subtleties of such words as
"empty," leaving us nowhere, completely with what is.

Finally we come to the conclusion that form is just form
and emptiness is just emptiness, which has been described in
the sutra as seeing that form is no other than emptiness,
emptiness is no other than form; they are indivisible. We
see that looking for beauty or philosophical meaning to life
is merely a way of justifying ourselves, saying that things
are not so bad as we think. Things are as bad as we think!
Form is form, emptiness is emptiness, things are just what
they are and we do not have to try to see them in the light
of some sort of profundity. Finally we come down to earth,
we see things as they are. This does not mean having an in-
spired mystical vision with archangels, cherubs and sweet

190 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

music playing. But things are seen as they are, in their own
qualities. So shunyata in this case is the complete absence of
concepts or filters of any kind, the absence even of the "form
is empty" and the "emptiness is form" conceptualization. It
is a question of seeing the world in a direct way without de-
siring "higher" consciousness or significance or profundity.
It is just directly perceiving things literally, as they are in
their own right.

We might ask how we could apply this teaching to everyday
life. There is a story that when the Buddha gave his first dis-
course on shunyata, some of the arhats had heart attacks and
died from the impact of the teaching. In sitting meditation
these arhats had experienced absorption in space, but they
were still dwelling upon space. Inasmuch as they were still
dwelling upon something, there was still an experience and
an experiencer. The shunyata principle involves not dwelling
upon anything, not distinguishing between this and that, being
suspended nowhere.

If we see things as they are, then we do not have to interpret
or analyze them further; we do not need to try to understand
things by imposing spiritual experience or philosophical ideas
upon them. As a famous Zen master said: "When I eat, I eat;
when I sleep, I sleep." Just do what you do, completely, fully.
To do so is to be a rishi, an honest, truthful person, a straight-
forward person who never distinguishes between this and that.
He does things literally, directly, as they are. He eats when-
ever he wants to eat; he sleeps whenever he wants to sleep.
Sometimes the Buddha is described as the Maharishi, the
Great Rishi who was not trying to be truthful but simply was
true in his open state.

The interpretation of shunyata which we have been dis-
cussing is the view of the Madhyamika or "Middle Way"

Shunyata 191

philosophical school founded by Nagarjuna. It is a descrip-
tion of an experiential reality which can never be accurately
described because words simply are not the experience. Words
or concepts only point to partial aspects of experience. In
fact, it is dubious that one can even speak of "experiencing"
reality, since this would imply a separation between the ex-
periencer and the experience. And finally, it is questionable
whether one can even speak of "reality" because this would
imply the existence of some objective knower outside and
separate from it, as though reality were a nameable thing
with set limits and boundaries. Thus the Madhyamika school
simply speaks of the tathata, "as it is." Nagarjuna much pre-
ferred to approach truth by taking the arguments of other
philosophical schools on their own terms and logically reduc-
ing them ad absurdum, rather than by himself offering any
definitions of reality.

There are several other major philosophical approaches
to the problems of truth and reality which preceded and in-
fluenced the development of the Madhyamika school. These
lines of thought find their expression not only in the earlier
Buddhist philosophical schools but also in the approaches of
theistic Hinduism, Vedantism, Islam, Christianity, and most
other religious and philosophical traditions. From the point
of view of the Madhyamika school, these other approaches
can be grouped together into three categories: the eternalists,
the nihilists, and the atomists. The Madhyamikas viewed the
first two of these approaches as being false, and the third as
being only partially true.

The first and most obvious of these three "misconceptions
of the nature of reality" is eternalism, an approach which is
often that of the more naive versions of theism. Eternalistic
doctrines view phenomena as containing some sort of eternal

192 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

essence. Things are born and die, yet they contain an essence
which does not perish. The quality of eternal existence must
adhere to some thing, so the holders of this doctrine usually
subscribe to belief in God, a soul, an atman, an ineffable self.
Thus the believer asserts that something does exist as solid,
ongoing, and eternal. It is reassuring to have something solid
to hang onto, to dwell upon, a fixed way of understanding the
world and one's relationship to it.

However, eventually the believer in eternalistic doctrines
may become disillusioned with a God he has never met, a
soul or essence he cannot find. Which brings us to the next
and somewhat more sophisticated misconception of reality:
nihilism. This view holds that everything is generated out of
nothingness, mystery. Sometimes this approach appears as
both theistic and atheistic assertions that the Godhead is un-
knowable. The sun shines, throws light upon the earth, helps
life to grow, provides heat and light. But we can find no
origin to life; there is no logical starting point from which
the universe began. Life and the world are merely the dance
of maya, illusion. Things are simply generated spontaneously
out of nowhere. So nothingness seems important in this ap-
proach: an unknowable reality somehow beyond apparent
phenomena. The universe takes place mysteriously; there is
no real explanation at all. Possibly a nihilist would say that
the human mind cannot comprehend such mystery. Thus, in
this view of reality, mystery is treated as a thing. The idea
that there is no answer is relied upon and dwelt upon as the
answer.

The nihilistic approach evokes the psychological attitude
of fatalism. You understand logically that if you do some-
thing, things happen in reaction to it. You see a continuity of
cause and effect, a chain reaction over which you have no con-

Shunyata 193

trol. This chain reactive process springs from the mystery of
"nothingness." Therefore, if you murder someone, it was your
karma to murder and was inevitable, fore-ordained. For that
matter if you do a good deed, it has nothing to do with whether
or not you are awake. Everything springs from this mysterious
"nothingness" which is the nihilistic approach to reality. It is
a very naive view: one leaves everything to mystery. When-
ever we are not quite certain of things which are beyond the
scope of our conceptualized ideas, then we begin to panic. We
are afraid of our own uncertainty and we attempt to fill the
gap with something else. The something else is usually a philo-
sophical belief — in this case, the belief in mystery. We very
eagerly, very hungrily search for nothingness, surveying every
dark corner in our attempts to find it. But we find only the
crumbs. We find nothing more than that. It is very mysterious.
As long as we continue to look for a conceptual answer there
will always be areas of mystery, which mystery is itself an-
other concept.

Whether we are eternalists or nihilists or atomists, we con-
stantly assume that there is a "mystery," something which we
do not know: the meaning of life, the origin of the universe,
the key to happiness. We struggle after this mystery, trying
to become a person who knows or possesses it, naming it
"God," the "soul," "atman," "Brahman," "shunyata," and so
on. Certainly this is not the Madhyamika approach to reality,
though the early Hinayana schools of Buddhism to some
extent fell into this trap, which is why their approach is con-
sidered only a partial truth.

The Hinayana approach to reality sees impermanence as
the great mystery: that which is born must change and die.
However, one cannot see impermanence itself but only its
manifestation in form. Thus the Hinayanists describe the uni-

194 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

verse in terms of atoms existing in space and moments existing
in time. As such, they are atomistic pluralists. The Hinayana
equivalent of shunyata is the understanding of the transitory
and insubstantial nature of form, so Hinayana meditation
practice is two-fold: contemplation of the many aspects of
impermanence — the processes of birth, growth, decay, and
death, and their elaborations; and mindfulness practice which
sees the impermanence of mental events. The arhat views
mental events and material objects and begins to see them
as momentary and atomistic happenings. Thus he discovers
that there is no permanent substance or solid thing as such.
This approach errs in conceptualizing the existence of entities
relative to each other, the existence of "this" relative to "that."

We can see the three elements of eternalism, nihilism, and
atomistic pluralism in different combinations in almost all
the major philosophies and religions of the world. From the
Madhyamika point of view, these three misconceptions of
reality are virtually inescapable as long as one searches for
an answer to an assumed question, as long as one seeks to
probe the so-called "mystery" of life. Belief in anything is
simply a way of labeling the mystery. Yogachara, a Mahayana
philosophical school, attempted to eliminate this mystery by
finding a union of mystery and the phenomenal world.

The main thrust of the Yogachara school is epistemologi-
cal. For this school the mystery is intelligence, that which
knows. The Yogacharyans solved the mystery by positing the
indivisible union of intelligence and phenomena. Thus there
is no individual knower; rather everything is "self-known."
There is only "one mind," which the Yogacharyans called
"self-luminous cognition," and both thoughts and emotions
and people and trees are aspects of it. Thus this school is also

Shunyata 195

referred to in the traditional literature as the citta-matra or
"mind-only" school.

The Yogachara school was the first school of Buddhist
thought to transcend the division between the knower and the
known. Thus its adherents explain confusion and suffering as
springing from the mistaken belief in an individual knower.
If a person believes that he knows the world, then the one
mind appears to be split, though actually its clear surface is
only muddied. The confused person feels that he has thoughts
about and reactions to external phenomena and so is caught
in a constant action and reaction situation. The enlightened
person realizes that thoughts and emotions on the one hand,
and the so-called external world on the other, are both the
"play of the mind." Thus the enlightened person is not caught
in the dualism of subject and object, internal and external,
knower and known, I and other. Everything is se//-known.

However, Nagarjuna contested the Yogacharin "mind-only"
proposition and, in fact, questioned the very existence of
"mind" altogether. He studied the twelve volumes of the
Prajnaparamita scriptures, which came out of the second turn-
ing of the Wheel of Doctrine by the Buddha, the teaching of
the middle portion of his life. Nagarjuna's conclusions are
summed up in the principle of "non-dwelling," the main prin-
ciple of the Madhyamika school. He said that any philosophi-
cal view could be refuted, that one must not dwell upon any
answer or description of reality, whether extreme or moderate,
including the notion of "one mind." Even to say that non-
dwelling is the answer is delusory, for one must not dwell
upon non-dwelling. Nagarjuna's way was one of non-philos-
ophy, which was not simply another philosophy at all. He
said, "The wise should not dwell in the middle either."

196 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

Madhyamika philosophy is a critical view of the Yogacharin
theory that everything is an aspect of mind. The Madhyamika
argument runs: "In order to say that mind exists or that every-
thing is the play of the one mind, there must be someone
watching mind, the knower of mind who vouches for its ex-
istence." Thus the whole of Yogachara is necessarily a theory
on the part of this watcher. But according to the Yogacharyans'
own philosophy of self-luminous cognition, subjective thoughts
about an object are delusive, there being no subject or object
but only the one mind of which the watcher is a part. There-
fore, it is impossible to state that the one mind exists. Like
the physical eye, self-luminous cognition cannot see itself, just
as a razor cannot cut itself. By the Yogacharyans' own ad-
mission, there is no one to know that the one mind exists.

Then what can we say about mind or reality? Since there
is no one to perceive a mind or reality, the notion of existence
in terms of "things" and "form" is delusory; there is no
reality, no perceiver of reality, and no thoughts derived from
perception of reality. Once we have taken away this precon-
ception of the existence of mind and reality, then situations
emerge clearly, as they are. There is no one to watch, no one
to know anything. Reality just is, and this is what is meant
by the term "shunyata." Through this insight the watcher
which separates us from the world is removed.

How then does belief in an "I" and the whole neurotic
process begin? Roughly, according to the Madhyamikas, when-
ever a perception of form occurs, there is an immediate re-
action of fascination and uncertainty on the part of an implied
perceiver of the form. This reaction is almost instantaneous.
It takes only a fraction of a fraction of a second. And as soon
as we have established recognition of what the thing is, our
next response is to give it a name. With the name of course

Shunyata 197

comes concept. We tend to conceptualize the object, which
means that at this point we are no longer able to perceive
things as they actually are. We have created a kind of padding,
a filter or veil between ourselves and the object. This is what
prevents the maintenance of continual awareness both during
and after meditation practice. This veil removes us from pan-
oramic awareness and the presence of the meditative state,
because again and again we are unable to see things as they
are. We feel compelled to name, to translate, to think dis-
cursively, and this activity takes us further away from direct
and accurate perception. So shunyata is not merely awareness
of what we are and how we are in relation to such and such
an object, but rather it is clarity which transcends conceptual
padding and unnecessary confusions. One is no longer fasci-
nated by the object nor involved as a subject. It is freedom
from this and that. What remains is open space, the absence
of the this-and-that dichotomy. This is what is meant by the
Middle Way or Madhyamika.

The experience of shunyata cannot be developed without
first having worked through the narrow path of discipline and
technique. Technique is necessary to start with, but it is also
necessary at some stage for the technique to fall away. From
the ultimate point of view the whole process of learning and
practice is quite unnecessary. We could perceive the absence
of ego at a single glance. But we would not accept such a
simple truth. In other words, we have to learn in order to
unlearn. The whole process is that of undoing the ego. We
start by learning to deal with neurotic thoughts and emotions.
Then false concepts are removed through the understanding
of emptiness, of openness. This is the experience of shunyata.
Shunyata in Sanskrit means literally "void" or "emptiness,"
that is to say, "space," the absence of all conceptualized at-

198 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

titudes. Thus Nagarjuna says in his Commentary on Madhya-
mika: "Just as the sun dispels darkness, the perfect sage has
conquered the false habits of mind. He does not see the mind
or thought derived from the mind."

The Heart Sutra ends with "the great spell" or mantra. It
says in the Tibetan version: "Therefore the mantra of tran-
scendent knowledge, the mantra of deep insight, the unsur-
passed mantra, the unequalled mantra, the mantra which calms
all suffering, should be known as truth, for there is no de-
ception." The potency of this mantra comes not from some
imagined mystical or magical power of the words but from
their meaning. It is interesting that after discussing shunyata
— form is empty, emptiness is form, form is no other than
emptiness, emptiness is identical with form and so on — the
sutra goes on to discuss mantra. At the beginning it speaks in
terms of the meditative state, and finally it speaks of mantra
or words. This is because in the beginning we must develop
a confidence in our understanding, clearing out all precon-
ceptions; nihilism, eternalism, all beliefs have to be cut
through, transcended. And when a person is completely ex-
posed, fully unclothed, fully unmasked, completely naked,
completely opened — at that very moment he sees the power
of the word. When the basic, absolute, ultimate hypocrisy has
been unmasked, then one really begins to see the jewel shining
in its brightness: the energetic, living quality of openness, the
living quality of surrender, the living quality of renunciation.

Renunciation in this instance is not just throwing away but,
having thrown everything away, we begin to feel the living
quality of peace. And this particular peace is not feeble peace,
feeble openness, but it has a strong character, an invincible
quality, an unshakeable quality, because it admits no gaps
of hypocrisy. It is complete peace in all directions, so that not

Shunyata 199

even a speck of a dark corner exists for doubt and hyprocrisy.
Complete openness is complete victory because we do not fear,
we do not try to defend ourselves at all. Therefore this is a
great mantra. One would have thought that instead of saying,
Om gate gate paragate parasamgate bodhi svaha, this mantra
would say something about shunyata — Om shunyata maha-
shunyata — or something of the sort. Instead it says. Gate
gate — "gone, gone, gone beyond, completely gone." This is
much stronger than saying "shunyata," because the word
"shunyata" might imply a philosophical interpretation. In-
stead of formulating something philosophical, this mantra
exposes that which lies beyond philosophy. Therefore it is
gate gate — "gone, given up, got rid of, opened." The first
gate is "rid of the veil of conflicting emotions." The second
gate represents the veil of primitive beliefs about reality.
That is, the first gate represents the idea that "form is empty,"
and the second gate refers to "emptiness is form." Then the
next word of the mantra is paragate — "gone beyond, com-
pletely exposed." Now form is form — paragate — and it is
not only that form is form but emptiness is emptiness, para-
samgate — "completely gone beyond." Bodhi. Bodhi here
means "completely awake." The meaning is "given up, com-
pletely unmasked, naked, completely open." Svaha is a tradi-
tional ending for mantras which means, "Sobeit." "Gone,
gone, gone beyond, completely exposed, awake, sobeit."

Q: How does desire lead to birth?

A: Each time there is a desire there is another birth. You
plant wantingness, wanting to do something, wanting to grasp
something. Then that desire to grasp also invites something
further. Birth here means the birth of further confusion,
further dissatisfaction, further wanting. For example, if you

200 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

have a great desire for money and you manage to get a lot
of it, then you also want to buy something with that money.
One thing leads to the next, a chain reaction, so that desire
becomes a kind of network. You want something, want to draw
something into you, continually.

The experience of shunyata, seeing precisely and clearly
what is, somehow cuts through this network, this spider's web,
because the spider's web is woven in the space of desire, the
space of wanting. And when the space of shunyata replaces
it, so to speak, the whole conceptualized formulation of desire
is completely eliminated, as though you had arrived on an-
other planet with different air, or a place without oxygen at
all. So shunyata provides a new atmosphere, a new environ-
ment, which will not support clinging or grasping. Therefore
the experience of shunyata also makes impossible the plant-
ing of the seed of karma, which is why it is said that shunyata
is that which gives birth to all the buddhas, all the awakened
ones. "Awakened" means not being involved in the chain
reactions and complications of the karmic process.

Q: Why is it that so many of us have such a strong tendency
to not see things as they really are?

A: I think largely because we are afraid that we will see it.
Q: Why are we afraid of seeing it?

A: We want an umbilical cord attached to the ego through
which we can feed all the time.

Q: Can this understanding of "emptiness is form" be at-
tained through the practice of meditation techniques or must
it come to us spontaneously?

A: The perception of shunyata is not achieved through the

Shunyata 201

practice of mental gymnastics ; it is a matter of actually seeing
it. It could be perceived in sitting meditation or it could be
seen in life situations. There is no set pattern to producing it.
In the ease of Naropa, the great Indian yogi, he perceived
shunyata when his master took off his sandal and slapped him
on the cheek. That very moment he saw it. It depends upon
the individual situation.

Q: Then it is not something you go looking for?
A: If one is really keen, really devoted to finding it, com-
pletely devoted to understanding it, then one has to give up
looking for it.

Q: I have some difficulty reconciling the concept of shunyata
with what is going on right now.

A: When you have a shunyata experience, it does not mean
that you cease to perceive, cease to live on Earth. You still
live on the Earth, but you see more precisely what is here.
We believe that we know things as they are. But we only see
our version which is not quite complete. There is much more
to learn about the true subtleties of life. The things we see are
a very crude version of what is. Having an experience of
shunyata does not mean that the whole world completely dis-
solves into space, but that you begin to notice the space so
that the world is somewhat less crowded. For example, if we
are going to communicate to someone, we might prepare our-
selves to say such and such to calm him down or explain things
to him. But then he comes out with so many complications of
his own, he churns out so much himself, that before you know
where you are, you are completely confused by him. You
share his confusion rather than having the clarity you pre-
pared at the beginning. You have been completely absorbed

202 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

into his confusion. So shunyata means seeing through con-
fusion. You keep precision and clarity all the time.

Q: And with this experience, you are still alive in this
world?

A: Yes, of course! You see, enlightenment does not mean
dying. Otherwise, enlightenment would be a kind of suicide,
which is ridiculous. That is the nihilistic approach, attempting
to escape from the world.

Q: Is an enlightened person omniscient?
A: I am afraid this is a mistaken conclusion drawn from
the Yogacharin one mind theory, a theory which has also ap-
peared in other religious and philosophical traditions. The
idea is that an enlightened person has become the one mind
and so knows everything that ever was, is or could be. You
always get this kind of wild speculation when people involve
themselves with "mystery," the unknowable. But I am afraid
that there really is no such thing as the one mind.

Q: How is one to begin to see what is?
A: By not beginning, by giving up the idea of a beginning.
If you try to affirm a particular territory — my experience —
then you are not going to see shunyata. You have to give up
the idea of territory altogether. Which can be done, it is not
impossible. It is not just philosophical speculation. One can
give up the idea of territory, one can not begin.

Q: Is it part of not beginning to try for so long that one
gives up from exhaustion? Can one give up before one has
tried? Is there any shortcut? Must the monkey go through the

Shunyata 203

whole process of banging himself against the walls and hal-
lucinating?

A: I think we must. Sudden enlightenment comes only with
exhaustion. Its suddenness does not necessarily mean that
there is a shortcut. In some cases, people might experience a
sudden flash of enlightenment, but if they do not work their
way through, their habitual thought patterns will resume and
their minds will become overcrowded again. One must make
the journey because, as you said, at the point where you begin
to be disappointed you get it.

Q: This seems to lead back to the Hinayana path of dis-
cipline. Is that correct?

A: Yes, meditation is hard work, manual work, so to speak.

Q: Having begun, it seems that there is something to do.
A: There is something to do, but at the same time whatever
you are doing is only related to the moment rather than being
related to achieving some goal in the future, which brings us
back to the practice of meditation. Meditation is not a matter
of beginning to set foot on the path; it is realizing that you
are already on the path — fully being in the nowness of this
very moment — now, now, now. You do not actually begin
because you have never really left the path.

Q: You described enlightened people as being free from
the karmic chain. I would like to know what you meant by
that, because it seems to me that they create a new karmic
chain.

A: The word "karma" means "creation" or "action" —
chain reaction. For example, by looking toward the future
we plant a seed in the present. In the case of enlightened

204 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

people, they do not plan for the future because they have no
desire to provide security for themselves. They do not need
to know the pattern of the future anymore. They have con-
quered the preconception of "future." They are fully in the
now. The now has the potential of the future in it, as well as
that of the past. Enlightened people have completely mastered
the restless and paranoid activities of mind. They are com-
pletely, fully in the moment; therefore they are free from
sowing further seeds of karma. When the future comes they
do not see it as a result of their good deeds in the past; they
see it as present all the time. So they do not create any further
chain reactions.

Q: Is the "awake quality" different from just being in the
now?

A: Yes. Enlightenment is being awake in the nowness. For
instance, animals live in the present and, for that matter, an
infant child lives in the present; but that is quite different
from being awake or enlightened.

Q: I do not quite understand what you mean by animals
and babies living in the present. What is the difference be-
tween living in the present in that form and being an enlight-
ened person?

A: I think it is a question of the difference between dwelling
upon something and really being in the nowness in terms of
"awake." In the case of an infant or animal, it is being in the
nowness but it is dwelling upon the nowness. They get some
kind of feedback from it by dwelling upon it, although they
may not notice it consciously. In the case of an enlightened
being, he is not dwelling upon the idea — "I am an enlight-
ened being" — because he has completely transcended the idea

Sliunyata 205

of "I am." He is just fully being. The subject-object division
has been completely transcended.

Q: If the enlightened being is without ego and feels the sor-
rows and the sadness of those around him but does not feel
his own necessarily, then would you call his willingness to
help them get over their difficulties "desire"?
A: I don't think so. Desire comes in when you want to see
someone happy. When that person is happy, then you feel
happy because the activities you have engaged in to make him
happy are, in a sense, done for yourself rather than for the
other person. You would like to see him happy. An enlight-
ened being has no such attitude. Whenever someone requires
his help, he just gives it; there is no self-gratification or self-
congratulation involved.

Q: Why did you name your center here Karma Dzong?
A: Karma means "action" as well as "Buddha activity,"
and Dzong is the Tibetan word for "fortress." Situations just
present themselves rather than being deliberately premedi-
tated. They are perpetually developing, happening quite spon-
taneously. Also there seems to be a tremendous amount of
energy at the center, which also could be said of karma. It is
energy which is not being misled by anyone, energy which is
in the fortress. What is happening definitely had to happen.
It takes the shape of spontaneous karmic relationships rather
than of missionary work or the conversion of people into
Buddhists.

Q: How would you relate samadhi and nirvana to the con-
cept of shunyata?

A: There is a problem here with words. It is not a matter

206 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

of differences; it is a matter of different emphases. Samadhi
is complete involvement and nirvana is freedom and both are
connected with shunyata. When we experience shunyata, we
are completely involved, without the subject-object division
of duality. We are also free from confusion.

Prajna and Compassion

In discussing shunyata, we found that we impose our pre-
conceptions, our ideas, our version of things onto phenomena
instead of seeing things as they are. Once we are able to see
through our veil of preconception, we realize that it is an
unnecessary and confused way of attaching handles to experi-
ences without considering whether the handles fit or not. In
other words, preconceptions are a form of security. When we
see something, immediately we name it and place it in a
category. But form is empty; it does not need our categoriza-
tions to express its full nature, to be what it is. Form is in
itself empty of preconception.

But, emptiness is form. This means that at this level of
understanding we place too much value on seeing form naked
of preconceptions. We would like to experience this kind of
insight, as though seeing form as empty were a state we could
force our minds to achieve. We search for emptiness so that
it too becomes a thing, a form, instead of true emptiness. It is
a problem of too much ambition.

Thus, the next stage is for us to give up our ambition to
see form as empty. At this point form really emerges from
behind the veil of our preconceptions. Form is form, naked
form without any philosophical implication behind it. And

208 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

emptiness is emptiness; there is nothing to hang onto. We
have discovered the experience of non-duality.

Nevertheless, having realized that form is form and empti-
ness is emptiness, we still appreciate our insight into non-
duality. There is still a sense of the knower, the experiencer
of the insight. There is an awareness that something has been
removed, something is absent. Subtly, we dwell on non-duality.
Here we enter into a transitional phase between the Mahayana
Path and Tantra in which prajna is a continuous experience
and compassion is no longer deliberate. But there is still some
self-consciousness, some sense of perceiving our own prajna
and compassion, some sense of checking and appreciating our
actions.

A? we discussed in the talk on bodhisattva action, prajna
is a very clear, precise and intelligent state of being. It has a
sharp quality, the ability to penetrate and reveal situations.
Compassion is the open atmosphere in which prajna sees. It is
an open awareness of situations which triggers action in-
formed by the eye of prajna. Compassion is very powerful,
but it must be directed by the intelligence of prajna, just as
intelligence needs the atmosphere of the basic openness of
compassion. The two must come simultaneously.

Compassion contains fundamental fearlessness, fearless-
ness without hesitation. This fearlessness is marked by tre-
mendous generosity, in contrast to the fearlessness of exerting
one's power over others. This "generous fearlessness" is the
fundamental nature of compassion and transcends the animal
instinct of ego. Ego would like to establish its territory, where-
as compassion is completely open and welcoming. It is a
gesture of generosity which excludes no one.

Compassion begins to play a part in the practice of medi-
tation when you experience, not only calm and peaCe, but also

Prajna and Compassion 209

warmth. There is a great feeling of warmth which gives rise
to an attitude of openness and welcoming. When this feeling
arises, there is no longer any anxiety or fear that external
agents will act as obstacles to your practice of meditation.

This instinctive warmth, which is developed in meditation
practice, also extends into the post-meditation experience of
awareness. With this kind of true awareness you cannot divorce
yourself from your activity. To do so would be impossible.
If you try to concentrate upon your action — making a cup of
tea or any daily-life activity — and at the same time try to be
aware, you are living in a dream-state. As one of the great
Tibetan teachers said, "Trying to combine awareness and
action in an unskillful way is like trying to mix oil and water."
True awareness must be open rather than cautious or protec-
tive. It is open-mindedness, experiencing the open space within
a situation. You may be working, but awareness could also
operate within the context of your work, which then would
be the practice of compassion and meditation.

Generally awareness is absent in our lives; we are com-
pletely absorbed in whatever we are doing and we forget the
rest of the environment, we seal it off. But the positive force
of compassion and prajna is open and intelligent, sharp and
penetrating, giving us a panoramic view of life which reveals
not only specific actions and events but their whole environ-
ments as well. This creates the right situation for communica-
tion with other people. In dealing with other people, we must
not only be aware of what they are saying, but we must also
be open to the whole tone of their being. A person's actual
words and smile represent only a small fraction of his com-
munication. What is equally important is the quality of his
presence, the way he presents himself to us. This communi-
cates much more than words alone.

210 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

When a person is both wise and compassionate, his actions
are very skillful and radiate enormous energy. This skillful
action is referred to as upaya, "skillful means." Here "skill-
ful" does not mean devious or diplomatic. Upaya just happens
in response to a situation. If a person is totally open, his
response to life will be very direct, perhaps even outrageous
from a conventional point of view, because "skillful means"
does not allow any nonsense. It reveals and deals with situa-
tions as they are: it is extremely skillful and precise energy.
If the coverings and masks we wear were suddenly to be torn
away by this energy, it would be extremely painful. It would
be embarrassing because we would find ourselves with nothing
on, naked. At such a moment this kind of openness and direct-
ness, the outrageously blunt nature of prajna and compassion,
might saem extremely cold and impersonal.

To the conventional way of thinking, compassion simply
means being kind and warm. This sort of compassion is de-
scribed in the scriptures as "grandmother's love." You would
expect the practitioner of this type of compassion to be ex-
tremely kind and gentle; he would not harm a flea. If you
need another mask, another blanket to warm yourself, he will
provide it. But true compassion is ruthless, from ego's point
of view, because it does not consider ego's drive to maintain
itself. It is "crazy wisdom." It is totally wise, but it is crazy
as well, because it does not relate to ego's literal and simple-
minded attempts to secure its own comfort.

The logical voice of ego advises us to be kind to other
people, to be good boys and girls and lead innocent little lives.
We work at our regular jobs and rent a cozy room or apart-
ment for ourselves; we would like to continue in this way, but
suddenly something happens which tears us out of our secure
little nest. Either we become extremely depressed or something

Prajna and Compassion 211

outrageously painful occurs. We begin to wonder why heaven
has been so unkind. "Why should God punish me? I have
been a good person, I have never hurt a soul." But there is
something more to life than that.

What are we trying to secure? Why are we so concerned
to protect ourselves? The sudden energy of ruthless com-
passion severs us from our comforts and securities. If we
were never to experience this kind of shock, we would not be
able to grow. We have to be jarred out of our regular, repeti-
tive and comfortable life-styles. The point of meditation is
not merely to be an honest or good person in the conventional
sense, trying only to maintain our security. We must begin to
become compassionate and wise in the fundamental sense,
open and relating to the world as it is.

Q: Could you discuss the basic difference between love and
compassion and in what relation they stand to each other?
A: Love and compassion are vague terms; we can interpret
them in different ways. Generally in our lives we take a grasp-
ing approach, trying to attach ourselves to different situations
in order to achieve security. Perhaps we regard someone as
our baby, or, on the other hand, we might like to regard our-
selves as helpless infants and leap into someone's lap. This
lap might belong to an individual, an organization, a com-
munity, a teacher, any parental figure. So-called "love" re-
lationships usually take one of these two patterns. Either we
are being fed by someone or we are feeding others. These are
false, distorted kinds of love or compassion. The urge to com-
mitment — that we would like to "belong," be someone's child,
or that we would like them to be our child — is seemingly
powerful. An individual or organization or institution or any-
thing could become our infant; we would nurse it, feed it milk.

212 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

encourage its growth. Or else the organization is the great
mother by which we are continuously fed. Without our
"mother" we cannot exist, cannot survive. These two patterns
apply to any life energy which has the potential to entertain
us. This energy might be as simple as a casual friendship or
an exciting activity we would like to undertake, and it might
be as complicated as marriage or our choice of career. Either
we would like to control the excitement or we would like to
become a part of it.

However, there is another kind of love and compassion, a
third way. Just be what you are. You do not reduce yourself
to the level of an infant nor do you demand that another per-
son leap into your lap. You simply be what you are in the
world, in life. If you can be what you are, external situations
will become as they are, automatically. Then you can com-
municate directly and accurately, not indulging in any kind
of nonsense, any kind of emotional or philosophical or psy-
chological interpretation. This third way is a balanced way
of openness and communication which automatically allows
tremendous space, room for creative development, space in
which to dance and exchange.

Compassion means that we do not play the game of hy-
pocrisy or self-deception. For instance, if we want something
from someone and we say, "I love you," often we are hoping
that we will be able to lure them into our territory, over to
our side. This kind of proselytizing love is extremely limited.
"You should love me, even if you hate me, because I am
filled with love, am high on love, am completely intoxicated!"
What does it mean? Simply that the other person should
march into your territory because you say that you love him,
that you are not going to harm him. It is very fishy. Any
intelligent person is not going to be seduced by such a ploy.

Prajna and Compassion 213

"If you really love me as I am, why do you want me to enter
your territory? Why this issue of territory and demands at
all? What do you want from me? How do I know, if I do
march into your 'loving' territory, that you aren't going to
dominate me, that you won't create a claustrophobic situation
with your heavy demands for love?" As long as there is ter-
ritory involved with a person's love, other people will be
suspicious of his "loving" and "compassionate" attitude. How
do we make sure, if a feast is prepared for us, that the food
is not dosed with poison? Does this openness come from a
centralized person, or is it total openness?

The fundamental characteristic of true compassion is pure
and fearless openness without territorial limitations. There is
no need to be loving and kind to one's neighbors, no need to
speak pleasantly to people and put on a pretty smile. This
little game does not apply. In fact it is embarrassing. Real
openness exists on a much larger scale, a revolutionarily large
and open scale, a universal scale. Compassion means for you
to be as adult as you are, while still maintaining a childlike
quality. In the Buddhist teachings the symbol for compassion,
as I have already said, is one moon shining in the sky while
its image is reflected in one hundred bowls of water. The
moon does not demand, "If you open to me, I will do you a
favor and shine on you." The moon just shines. The point is
not to want to benefit anyone or make them happy. There is
no audience involved, no "me" and "them." It is a matter of
an open gift, complete generosity without the relative notions
of giving and receiving. That is the basic openness of com-
passion: opening without demand. Simply be what you are,
be the master of the situation. If you will just "be," then life
flows around and through you. This will lead you into work-
ing and communicating with someone, which of course de-

214 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

mands tremendous warmth and openness. If you can afford
to be what you are, then you do not need the "insurance
policy" of trying to be a good person, a pious person, a com-
passionate person.

Q: This ruthless compassion sounds cruel.
A: The conventional approach to love is like that of a father
who is extremely naive and would like to help his children
satisfy all their desires. He might give them everything:
money, drink, weapons, food, anything to make them happy.
However, there might be another kind of father who would
not merely try to make his children happy, but who would
work for their fundamental health.

Q: Why would a truly compassionate person have any con-
cern with giving anything?

A: It is not exactly giving but opening, relating to other
people. It is a matter of acknowledging the existence of other
people as they are, rather than relating to people in terms of
a fixed and preconceived idea of comfort or discomfort.

Q: Isn't there a considerable danger of self-deception in-
volved with the idea of ruthless compassion? A person might
think he is being ruthlessly compassionate, when in fact he
is only releasing his aggressions.

A: Definitely, yes. It is because it is such a dangerous idea
that I have waited until now to present it, after we have dis-
cussed spiritual materialism and the Buddhist path in general
and have laid a foundation of intellectual understanding. At
the stage of which I am speaking, if a student is to actually
practice ruthless compassion, he must have already gone
through a tremendous amount of work: meditation, study.

Prajna and Compassion 215

cutting through, discovering self-deception and sense of hu-
mor, and so on. After a person has experienced this process,
made this long and difficult journey, then the next discovery
is that of compassion and prajna. Until a person has studied
and meditated a great deal, it would be extremely dangerous
for him to try to practice ruthless compassion.

Q: Perhaps a person can grow into a certain kind of open-
ness, compassion with regard to other people. But then he
finds that even this compassion is still limited, still a pattern.
Do we always rely on our openness to carry us through? Is
there any way to make sure we are not fooling ourselves?
A: That is very simple. If we fool ourselves at the beginning,
there will be some kind of agreement that we automatically
make with ourselves. Surely everyone has experienced this.
For instance, if we are speaking to someone and exaggerating
our story, before we even open our mouths we will say to
ourselves, "I know I am exaggerating, but I would like to
convince this person." We play this little game all the time.
So it is a question of really getting down to the nitty-gritty
of being honest and fully open with ourselves. Openness to
other people is not the issue. The more we open to ourselves,
completely and fully, then that much more openness radiates
to others. We really know when we are fooling ourselves, but
we try to play deaf and dumb to our own self-deception.

Tantra

After the bodhisattva has cut through fixed concepts with the
sword of prajna, he comes to the understanding that "form is
form, emptiness is emptiness." At this point he is able to
deal with situations with tremendous clarity and skill. As he
journeys still further along the Bodhisattva Path, prajna and
compassion deepen and he experiences greater awareness of
intelligence and space and greater awareness of peace. Peace
in this sense is indestructible, tremendously powerful. We
cannot be truly peaceful unless we have the invincible quality
of peace within us ; a feeble or temporary peacefulness could
always be disturbed. If we try to be kind and peaceful in a
naive way, encountering a different or unexpected situation
might interfere with our awareness of peace because that peace
has no strength in it, has no character. So peace must be stable,
deep-rooted and solid. It must have the quality of earth. If
we have power in ego's sense, we tend to exert that power and
use it as our tool to undermine others. But as bodhisattvas
we do not use power to undermine people; we simply remain
peaceful.

Finally we reach the tenth and last stage of the Bodhisattva
Path: the death of shunyata and the birth into "luminosity."
Shunyata as an experience falls away, exposing the luminous

218 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

quality of form. Prajna transforms into jnana or "wisdom."
But wisdom is still experienced as an external discovery. The
powerful jolt of the vajra-like samadhi is necessary to bring
the bodhisattva into the state of being wisdom rather than
knowing wisdom. This is the moment of bodhi or "awake,"
the entrance into Tantra. In the awakened state the colorful,
luminous qualities of the energies become still more vivid.

If we see a red flower, we not only see it in the absence of
ego's complexity, in the absence of preconceived names and
forms, but we also see the brilliance of that flower. If the
filter of confusion between us and the flower is suddenly re-
moved, automatically the air becomes quite clear and vision
is very precise and vivid.

While the basic teaching of Mahayana Buddhism is con-
cerned with developing prajna, transcendental knowledge, the
basic teaching of Tantra is connected with working with en-
ergy. Energy is described in the Kriyayoga Tantra of Vajra-
mala as "that which abides in the heart of all beings, self-
existing simplicity, that which sustains wisdom. This inde-
structible essence is the energy of great joy; it is all-pervasive,
like space. This is the dharma body of non-dwelling." Accord-
ing to this tantra, "This energy is the sustainer of the primor-
dial intelligence which perceives the phenomenal world. This
energy gives impetus to both the enlightened and the confused
states of mind. It is indestructible in the sense of being con-
stantly ongoing. It is the driving force of emotion and thought
in the confused state, and of compassion and wisdom in the
enlightened state."

In order to work with this energy the yogi must begin with
the surrendering process and then work on the shunyata prin-
ciple of seeing beyond conceptualization. He must penetrate
through confusion, seeing that "form is form and emptiness

Tantra 219

is empty," until finally he even cuts through dwelling upon
the shunyata experience and begins to see the luminosity of
form, the vivid, precise, colorful aspect of things. At this point
whatever is experienced in every day life through sense per-
ception is a naked experience, because it is direct. There is no
veil between him and "that." If a yogi works with energy
without having gone through the shunyata experience, then it
may be dangerous and destructive. For example, the practice
of some physical yoga exercises which stimulate one's energy
could awaken the energies of passion, hatred, pride and other
emotions to the extent that one would not know how to express
them. The scriptures describe a yogi who is completely in-
toxicated with his energy as being like a drunken elephant
who runs rampant without considering where he is going.

Tantric teaching surpasses the "looking beyond" bias of the
transcendental attitude that "form is form." When we speak
of transcendence in the Mahayana tradition, we mean trans-
cendence of ego. In the Tantric tradition we do not speak of
going beyond ego at all: it is too dualistic an attitude. Tantra
is much more precise than that. It is not a question of "getting
there" or "being there"; the Tantric tradition speaks of being
here. It speaks of transmutation and the analogy of alchemis-
tic practice is used a great deal. For example, the existence of
lead is not rejected but lead is transmuted into gold. You do
not have to change its metallic quality at all; you must simply
transmute it.

Tantra is synonymous with dharma, the path. The function
of Tantric practice is to transmute ego, enabling the primor-
dial intelligence to shine through. The word tantra means
"continuity." It is like the thread which strings beads to-
gether. The thread is the path. The beads are the working
basis of Tantric practice: that is, the Five Skandas or the five

220 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

constituents of ego as well as the primordial potential of the
Buddha within oneself, the primordial intelligence.

Tantric wisdom brings nirvana into samsara. This may
sound rather shocking. Before reaching the level of Tantra,
you try to abandon samsara and strive to achieve nirvana. But
eventually you must realize the futility of striving and then
become completely one with nirvana. In order to really cap-
ture the energy of nirvana and become one with it you need
a partnership with the ordinary world. Therefore the term
"ordinary wisdom," thamal-gyi-shepa, is used a great deal in
the Tantric tradition. It is the completely ordinary version of
"form is form, emptiness is empty"; it is what is. One can-
not reject the physical existence of the world as being some-
thing bad and associated with samsara. You can only under-
stand the essence of nirvana by looking into the essence of
samsara. Thus the path involves something more than simply
going beyond duality, something more than mere non-dualistic
understanding. You are able to see the "non-dualisticness," so
to speak, the "isness" quality of non-duality. You see beyond
the negation aspect of shunyata, the negation of duality. There-
fore, the term "shunyata" is not used very much in Tantra.
In Tantric tradition tathata, "what is," is used, rather than
"shunyata" or "emptiness." The word osel (Tibetan) or prab-
hasvara (Sanskrit), which means "luminosity," is also used
a lot rather than "shunyata." You find this reference to the
Tantric tradition in the Buddha's last turning of the Wheel of
Dharma: instead of saying, "Form is empty, emptiness is
form," and so on, he says that form is luminous. Luminosity
or prabhasvara is connected with mahasukha, the "great joy"
or "bliss," the full realization that "emptiness is emptiness."
It is not empty simply because form is also form.

The dynamic quality of energy is not expressed enough in

Tantra 221

the doctrine of shunyata because the whole discovery of shun-
yata derives its meaning relative to samsaric mind. Shunyata
offers an alternative to samsara and so the teaching of shun-
yata is directed toward the samsaric mentality. Even if this
teaching goes beyond saying that "form is empty and empti-
ness is form" to say that "emptiness is no other than form"
and "form is no other than emptiness," still it does not go so
far as to say that form has this energy and emptiness has this
energy. In the Vajrayana or Tantric teaching the principle of
energy plays a very important part.

The teaching must connect with the day to day lives of its
practitioners. We are confronted with the thoughts, emotions
and energies of our relationships with other people and the
world. How are we going to relate our understanding of shun-
yata to everyday events unless we recognize the energy aspect
of life? If we cannot dance with life's energies, we will not be
able to use our experience of shunyata to unite samsara and
nirvana. Tantra teaches not to suppress or destroy energy but
to transmute it; in other words, go with the pattern of energy.
When we find balance going with the energy, we begin to get
acquainted with it. We begin to find the right path with the
right direction. This does not mean that a person has to be-
come a drunken elephant, a wild yogi in the pejorative sense.

A perfect example of going with energy, of the positive wild
yogi quality, was the actual transmission of enlightenment
from Tilopa to Naropa. Tilopa removed his sandal and
slapped Naropa in the face. He used the situation of the mo-
ment, Naropa's energy of curiosity and seeking, transmuting
it into the awakened state. Naropa had tremendous energy
and intelligence, but his energy was not related to Tilopa's
understanding, to his openness of mind, which was another
kind of energy. In order to penetrate this barrier a sudden

222 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

jolt was needed, a shock which was not artificial. It is like a
crooked building which is just about to fall down but is
straightened suddenly, accidentally, by an earthquake. Nat-
ural circumstances are used to restore the original state of
openness. When one goes with the pattern of energy, then ex-
perience becomes very creative. The energy of wisdom and
compassion is continually operating in a precise and accurate
way.

As the yogi becomes more sensitive to the patterns and
qualities of energy, he sees more clearly the meaning or sym-
bolism in life experiences. The first half of Tantric practice,
the Lower Tantra, is called Mahamudra, which means "Great
Symbol." Symbol, in this sense, is not a "sign" representing
some philosophical or religious principle; it is the demonstra-
tion of the living qualities of what is. For instance, in the di-
rect perception of a flower, the perception of naked insight,
unclothed and unmasked, the color of the flower conveys a
message over and beyond the simple perception of color.
There is great meaning in this color, which is communicated
in a powerful, almost overwhelming way. Conceptualized
mind is not involved in the perception and so we are able to
see with great precision, as though a veil had been removed
from before our eyes.

Or if we hold a piece of rock in our hands with that clarity
of perception which is the direct contact of naked insight, we
not only feel the solidity of that one rock, but we also begin to
perceive the spiritual implications of it; we experience it as
an absolute expression of the solidity and majesty of earth.
In fact we could be holding Mount Everest in our hands, as
far as the recognition of fundamental solidity is concerned.
That small rock represents every aspect of solidness. I do not

Tantra 223

mean this in the physical sense alone; but I am speaking of
solidity in the spiritual sense, the solidity of peace and en-
ergy, indestructible energy. The yogi feels the solidity and
forbearance of earth — whatever you plant or bury in it, the
earth never reacts against it. In this rock he is aware of the
enlightened Wisdom of Equanimity as well as the samsaric
quality of ego-pride which wants to build a high pyramid or
monument to its own existence. Every situation we encounter
has this vivid connection with our state of being. It is interest-
ing to note that in the Tantric iconography a number of sym-
bolic figures are shown holding a mountain in one hand, which
represents exactly what we have been discussing: solid peace,
solid compassion, solid wisdom which cannot be influenced by
the frivolity of ego.

Every texture we perceive has some spiritual implication
automatically, and we begin to realize the tremendous energy
contained within this discovery and understanding. The medi-
tator develops new depths of insight through direct communi-
cation with the reality of the phenomenal world. He is able
to see not only the absence of complexity, the absence of du-
ality, but the stoneness of stone and the waterness of water.
He sees things precisely as they are, not merely in the physical
sense, but with awareness of their spiritual significance.
Everything he sees is an expression of spiritual discovery.
There is a vast understanding of symbolism and a vast under-
standing of energy. Whatever the situation, he no longer has
to force results. Life flows around him. This is the basic man-
dala principle. The mandala is generally depicted as a circle
which revolves around a center, which signifies that everything
around you becomes part of your awareness, the whole sphere
expressing the vivid reality of life. The only way to experience

224 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

things truly, fully, and properly is through the practice of
meditation, creating a direct link with nature, with life, with
all situations. When we speak of being highly developed spiri-
tually, this does not mean that we float in the air. In fact, the
higher we go, the more we come down to earth.

It is important to remember that the practice of meditation
begins with the penetration of the neurotic thought pattern
which is the fringe of ego. As we proceed further, we see
through not only the complexity of the thought processes but
also the heavy "meaningfulness" of concepts expressed in
names and theories. Then at last we create some space be-
tween this and that, which liberates us tremendously. Having
created space, we then go on to the Vajrayana practice of
creating a direct link with life experience. These three steps
are, in essence, the Three Yanas: the Hinayana, the vehicle
of method; the Mahayana, the vehicle of shunyata or space;
and the Vajrayana or Tantra, the vehicle of direct energy.

In the Tantric tradition energy is categorized in five basic
qualities or Buddha Families: Vajra, Ratna, Padma, Karma
and Buddha. Each Buddha Family has an emotion associated
with it which is transmuted into a particular "wisdom" or
aspect of the awakened state of mind. The Buddha Families
are also associated with colors, elements, landscapes, direc-
tions, seasons, with any aspect of the phenomenal world.

Vajra is associated with anger, which is transmuted into
Mirror-like Wisdom. We sense something beyond the cloudy,
possessive and aggressive qualities of anger and this intuitive
insight enables us to automatically transmute the essence of
anger into precision and openness, rather than deliberately
changing it.

Vajra is also associated with the element of water. Cloudy,
turbulent water symbolizes the defensive and aggressive na-

Tantra 225

ture of anger while clear water suggests the sharp, precise,
clear reflectiveness of Mirror-like Wisdom.

Vajra is the color white. Anger is the very blunt and direct
experience of defending oneself; therefore it is like a sheet of
white paper, very flat and opaque. But it also has the potential
of luminosity, of the brilliance of reflection which is Mirror-
like Wisdom.

Vajra is connected with the East, the dawn, winter. It is a
winter morning, crystal clear, icicles sharp and glittering. The
landscape is not empty or desolate but is full of all sorts of
thought-provoking sharpness. There are many things to in-
trigue the observer. For example, the ground, trees, plants all
have their own way of freezing. Different trees have difl^erent
ways of carrying snow and different ways of relating to tem-
perature.

Vajra deals with objects in terms of their textures and their
relations to each other. Everything is analyzed in its own
terms. The intelligence of Vajra never leaves any unexplored
areas or hidden corners. It is like water flowing over a flat
surface, completely covering the surface but remaining trans-
parent.

Ratna is associated with pride and earth — solidity, moun-
tains, hills, pyramids, buildings. "I am completely secure. I
am what I am." It is a very proud way of looking at oneself.
This means that one is afraid to loosen up, is continually pil-
ing up defenses, building a fortress. Equally, Ratna is the
Wisdom of Equanimity, which is all-pervading. Whether you
construct buildings out of earth or whether you simply leave
the earth as it is, it is the same thing. The earth remains as
it is. You do not feel defeated or threatened at all. If you are
a proud person, you feel yourself constantly challenged by
the possibility of failure and defeat. In the enlightened mind

226 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

the anxiety of maintaining oneself is transmuted into equa-
nimity. There is still awareness of the solidity and stability
of earth but there is no fear of losing it. Everything is open,
safe and dignified; there is nothing to fear.

Ratna is related to the South and autumn, fertility, richness
in the sense of continual generosity. When fruit is ripe, it auto-
matically falls to the ground, asking to be eaten up. Ratna has
this kind of giving away quality. It is luscious and open with
the quality of mid-morning. It is yellow, connected with the
sun's rays. Where Vajra is associated with crystal, Ratna is
gold, amber, saffron. It has a sense of depth, real earthiness
rather than texture, whereas Vajra is purely texture, a crispy
quality rather than fundamental depth. Ratna is so ripe and
earthy, it is like a gigantic tree which falls to the ground and
begins to rot and grow mushrooms all over it and is enriched
by the weeds growing around it. It is a log in which animals
might nest. Its color begins to turn to yellow and its bark to
peel off, revealing an interior which is very rich and very
solid. If you were to attempt to remove this log in order to
use it as part of a garden arrangement, it would be impossible
because it would crumble and fall apart. It would be too
heavy to carry anyway.

Padma is connected with passion, a grasping quality, a de-
sire to possess. In the background of passion there is the in-
stinct toward union, wanting to be completely one with some-
thing. But passion has an hysterical quality, a neurotic quality
which ignores the real state of being united and instead wants
to possess in order to become united. Passion defeats its own
purpose automatically. In the case of Discriminating Aware-
ness, which is the wisdom aspect of passion, one sees the
quality of "this" and "that" precisely and sharply. In other

Tantra 227

words, communication takes place. If you are going to com-
municate with someone, you must respect the existence of the
other person as well as your process of communication. Dis-
criminating Awareness Wisdom recognizes the fact of union,
which is quite different from dualistically separating "that "
from "this" in order to maintain oneself. The consuming
quality of burning fire, desire, is transmuted into the wisdom
of binding together through communication. You may be com-
pletely caught up with possessiveness in a spiritual or material
sense. You may want something more than you can have. You
may be so fascinated by the exotic qualities of the thing you
want that you are blind to the world around you. You are
completely wrapped up in desire, which produces an auto-
matic sort of stupidity and ignorance. This ignorance in desire
is transcended in Discriminating Awareness Wisdom.

Padma is linked with the West and color red. Red stands
out from any other color, is very provocative, draws you
towards it. It is also connected with the element of fire. In the
confused state fire does not discriminate among the things that
it grasps, burns and destroys. In the awake state the heat of
passion is transmuted into the warmth of compassion.

Padma is related to early spring. The harshness of winter
is just about to soften with the promise of summer. Ice begins
to melt, snowflakes become soggy. Padma is very much con-
nected with facade; it has no feeling of solidness or texture;
it is purely concerned with colors, the glamorous qualities,
sunset. The visual quality of the surface is more important
than its being. So padma is involved with art rather than sci-
ence or practicality.

Padma is a reasonable location, a place where wild flowers
grow, a perfect place to have animals roaming about, such

228 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

as a highland plateau. It is a place of meadows scattered with
gentle rocks suitable for young animals to play among.

Karma is associated with the emotion of jealousy, envy, and
the element of wind. However, the terms "jealousy" and "en-
vy" are not powerful and precise enough to describe the qual-
ity of Karma. "Absolute paranoia" probably is a good phrase.
You feel that you are not going to achieve any of your goals.
You become irritated by the accomplishments of other people.
You feel left behind and cannot bear to see others surpass you.
This fear, this distrust of oneself, is connected with the ele-
ment of wind. Wind never blows in all directions but it blows
in one direction at a time. This is the one-way view of para-
noia or envy.

Karma is connected with the Wisdom of All-Accomplish-
ing Action. The quality of paranoia falls away but the quali-
ties of energy, keenness to action and openness remain. In
other words, the active aspect of wind is retained so that one's
activity touches everything in its path. One's action is ap-
propriate because it does not involve self-conscious panic or
paranoia anymore. It sees the possibilities inherent in situa-
tions and automatically takes the appropriate course. It fulfills
the purpose.

Karma suggests summer in the North. It is the efficiency of
Karma which connects it with this season, for it is a summer
in which all things are active, growing, fulfilling their func-
tion. Millions of interconnected actions take place: living
things grow, plants, insects, animals. There are thunderstorms
and hailstorms. There is the sense that you are never left to
enjoy the summer because something is always moving in
order to maintain itself. It is a bit like late spring, but it is
more fertile because it sees that all things are fulfilled at the
right moment. The color of Karma is the green of vegetables

Tantra 229

and grasses, of growing energy. Whereas the Karma of sum-
mer is still competing, trying to give birth, the Ratna of au-
tumn has tremendous confidence; everything has been accom-
plished. The mood of Karma is after sunset, dusk, late day
and early night.

Buddha is associated with dullness and has an all-pervading
quality because it contains and goes with all the rest of the
emotions. The active factor in this dullness is the action of
ignoring. Ignoring does not want to see. It just ignores and
overcrowds itself. You are completely relaxed, completely
careless. You would rather maintain your stupor than search
or struggle for anything, and a slothful, stupid quality is
brought to all the other emotions.

The wisdom connected with Buddha is that of All-Encom-
passing Space. The all-pervading quality of dullness is kept
as the foundation, but the flicker of doubt and sloth in this
dullness is transformed into wisdom. This wisdom contains
tremendous energy and intelligence which run right through
all the other elements, colors, and emotions, which activate all
the rest of the Five Wisdoms.

Buddha is the foundation or the "basic ground." It is the
environment or oxygen which makes it possible for the other
principles to function. It has a sedate, solid quality. Ratna is
very solid and earthy as well, but it is not as earthy as Buddha
which is dull-earthy, uninteresting-earthy. Buddha is some-
what desolate, too spacious. It is a campsite where only the
stones from campfires are left. The place has a sense of having
been inhabited for a long time, but at present no one is there.
The inhabitants were not killed or forced to move violently;
they simply left. The mood is like that of the caves where
American Indians used to live. They have a feeling of the
past, but at the same time there are no outstanding character-

230 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

istics. The tone is very dull, quite possibly in the plains, very
flat. Buddha is connected with the color blue, the cool, spa-
cious quality of sky.

Q: How do the pictures of Buddhas, yidams, wrathful gods
and other symbols fit into the Tibetan spiritual path?
A: There is a great deal of misunderstanding regarding
Tibetan iconography. Perhaps we should quickly go through
the structure of iconography and symbolism in Tantra. There
is what is called "the iconography of the guru," which is con-
nected with the pattern of the path, with the fact that, before
you start to receive any teaching, you must surrender will-
ingly, must open yourself. In order to surrender you somehow
must identify yourself completely with the fullness and rich-
ness of life. At this point surrendering is not emptying in the
sense of shunyata emptiness, which is a more advanced ex-
perience. But in the early stages of the path surrender means
becoming an empty vessel. It also means identification with
the fullness, with the richness of the teaching. So symbolically
the gurus of the lineage wear highly ornamented robes, hats
and scepters and have other ornaments which they hold in
their hands.

Then there is the iconography of the yidams which is con-
nected with Tantric practice. Yidams are the different aspects
of the five Buddha-principles of energy. They are depicted as
male herukas or female dakinis and can be either wrathful or
peaceful. The wrathful aspect is associated with transmutation
by force, leaping into wisdom and choiceless transmutation.
It is the act of cutting through, associated with crazy wisdom.
Peaceful yidams are associated with transmutation by "pro-
cess"; that is, confusion is pacified and gradually worn out.

The yidams wear the costumes of rakshasas who in Indian

Tantra 231

mythology are vampires connected with Rudra, King of the
Maras, the evil ones. The symbolism involved is that, when
ignorance, symbolized by Rudra, has created its empire, then
wisdom appears and destroys the empire and takes the cos-
tumes of its emperor and his retinue. The yidams' costumes
symbolize that they have transmuted ego into wisdom. The
five-skulled crowns they wear represent the five emotions
which have been transmuted into the Five Wisdoms. These
emotions are not thrown away but are worn as ornaments.
Furthermore, the trident or trishula which the yidams carry
is ornamented with three heads : a fresh head, a dry shrunken
head and a skeleton head. The fresh head represents hot pas-
sion. The dry one represents cold anger and toughness, like
tough meat. The skeleton head represents stupidity. The tri-
shula is an ornament which symbolizes transcendence of these
three impulses. In addition the trident has three points which
represent the three basic principles of being: shunyata, en-
ergy and the quality of manifestation. These are the three
"bodies" of the Buddha, the Three Kayas: Dharmakaya,
Sambhogakaya and Nirmanakaya. All the ornaments worn by
the yidams — the bone ornaments, snakes and others — are as-
sociated with different aspects of the path. For example, they
wear a garland of fifty-one skulls which represents transcen-
dence of the fifty-one types of thought patterns discussed in
the Hinayana doctrine of Abhidharma.

In Tantric practice one identifies with a yidam of a particu-
lar Buddha Family corresponding to one's nature. For in-
stance, if a yidam is associated with the Ratna family, then
he will be yellow in color and have symbolism characteristic
of Ratna. The types of mandalas given to you by your teacher
depend upon the family to which you belong, whether you
belong to the passionate family or the family of pride, or

232 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

whether you have the quality of air or water in you. Generally
one can feel that certain people have the quality of earth and
solidness, and certain people have the quality of air, rushing
here and there, and other people have the quality of warmth
and a presence connected with fire. The mandalas are given
to you so that you can identify yourself with your particular
emotions which have the potential of transmuting into wisdom.
Sometimes you practice the visualization of these yidams.
However, when you begin working with them, you do not
visualize them immediately. You begin with an awareness of
shunyata and then develop the feeling of the presence of that
image or form. Then you recite a mantra which has an asso-
ciation with this particular feeling. In order to weaken the
strength of ego, one somehow must establish a link between
the imaginary presence and the watcher of oneself, the ego.
The mantra is the link. After the practice of mantra, you dis-
solve the image or the form into a certain color of light ap-
propriate to the specific yidam. Finally you end your visual-
ization with, again, an awareness of shunyata. The whole idea
is that these yidams must not be regarded as external gods who
will save you, but they are expressions of your true nature.
You identify yourself with the attributes and colors of particu-
lar yidams and feel the sound that comes from the mantra so
that finally you begin to realize that your true nature is in-
vincible. You become completely one with the yidam.

In Maha Ati, the highest tantra, the sense of identification
falls away and one merges into one's true nature. Only the
energies and colors remain. Previously you saw through forms
and images and sounds, saw their empty quality. Now you see
the forms, images, and sounds in their true quality. It is the
idea of returning to samsara which is expressed in the Zen
tradition by the Ox-herding pictures: you have no man and

Tantra 233

no ox, and then at the end, you have return to the world.

Thirdly, there is the iconography of the "protective divini-
ties." In the practice of identifying yourself vv^ith a particular
yidam you have to develop an awareness which throws you
back to your true nature from your confused nature. You
need sudden shocks, reminders all the time, an awake quality.
This awareness is represented by the protective divinities
which are shown in wrathful form. It is a sudden jerk which
reminds you. It is a wrathful awareness because it involves
leaping. This leap needs a certain kind of energy to cut
through confusion. You have to actually take the initiative
to leap without any hesitation from the boundary of confusion
into openness. You must really destroy hesitation. You must
destroy all obstacles you meet on the path. Therefore this
divinity is called protective. "Protection" does not mean se-
curing your safety, but it signifies a reference point, a guide-
line which reminds you, keeps you in your place, in the open.
For instance, there is a Mahakala protective divinity called
Six-Armed Mahakala who is black in color and stands on
Ganesha, the elephant-headed god who here symbolizes sub-
conscious thoughts. This subconscious gossip is an aspect of
slothfulness that automatically distracts you from being aware
and invites you back to being fascinated by your thoughts
and emotions. It especially plays upon the survey nature of
your thoughts — intellectual, domestic, emotional thoughts,
whatever they may be. The Mahakala brings you back to
openness. The intent of the symbolism is that the Mahakala
overpowers subconscious gossip by standing on it. The Ma-
hakala represents the leap into penetrating awareness.

Generally, all Buddhist Tantric iconography is included in
these three categories: the guru, the yidams and the protective

234 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

divinities. The iconography of the guru expresses the richness
of the lineage. The yidams allow you to identify with your
particular nature. Then there are the protective divinities to
act as reminders to you. The yidams and the protective di-
vinities are generally shown in varying intensities of wrath,
depending upon the intensity of awareness needed in order
for you to see your true nature.

The wrathful yidams are always associated with what is
known in Tantric terms as vajra anger, the anger which has
the tathata quality; in other words, it is anger without hatred,
a dynamic energy. This particular energy, whatever Wisdom
it may belong to, is invincible. It is completely indestructible,
imperturbable, because it is not created but is discovered as
an original quality. It is, therefore, not subject to birth and
death. It is always depicted as angry, wrathful and warrior-
like.

Q: How does transmutation take place?
A: Transmutation takes place with the understanding of
shunyata and then the sudden discovery of energy. You realize
that you no longer have to abandon anything. You begin to
see the underlying qualities of wisdom in your life-situation,
which means that there is a kind of leap. If you are highly
involved in one emotion such as anger, then by having a
sudden glimpse of openness, which is shunyata, you begin to
see that you do not have to suppress your energy. You do
not have to keep calm and suppress the energy of anger, but
you can transform your aggression into dynamic energy. It is
a question of how open you are, how much you are really
willing to do it. If there is less fascination and satisfaction
with the explosion and release of your energy, then there is
more likelihood of transmuting it. Once we become involved

Tantra 235

with the fascination and satisfaction of energy, then we are
unable to transmute it. You do not have to completely change
yourself, but you can use part of your energy in an awakened
state.

Q: What is the difference between jnana and prajna?
A: One cannot regard wisdom as an external experience.
That is the difference between wisdom and knowledge, jnana
and prajna. Prajna is knowledge in terms of relativity, and
jnana is wisdom beyond any kind of relativity. You are com-
pletely one with wisdom; you do not regard it as something
educational or something experiential.

Q: How do you transmute emotion? How do you deal with
it?

A: Well, that is a very personal question rather than an
intellectual one. The whole point is that we have not actually
experienced our emotions, although we think we have. We
have only experienced emotions in terms of me and my anger,
me and my desire. This "me" is a kind of central governing
structure. The emotions play the part of messengers, bureau-
crats and soldiers. Instead of experiencing emotions as being
separate from you, your rather unruly employees so to speak,
you must actually feel the texture and real living quality of
the emotions. Expressing or acting out hatred or desire on
the physical level is another way of trying to escape from
your emotions, just as you do when you try to repress them.
If one actually feels the living quality, the texture of the
emotions as they are in their naked state, then this experience
also contains ultimate truth. And automatically one begins
to see the simultaneously ironical and profound aspects of
the emotions, as they are. Then the process of transmutation,

236 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

that is, transmuting the emotions into wisdom, takes place
automatically. But, as I have said, it is a personal question;
we really have to do it. Until we actually do it, no words can
describe it. We have to be brave enough to actually encounter
our emotions, work with them in a real sense, feel their tex-
ture, the real quality of the emotions as they are. We would
discover that emotion actually does not exist as it appears,
but it contains much wisdom and open space. The problem
is that we never experience emotions properly. We think that
fighting and killing express anger, but these are another kind
of escape, a way of releasing rather than actually experienc-
ing emotion as it is. The basic nature of the emotions has not
been fell properly.

Q: When the emotions are transmuted, that doesn't mean
they disappear, does it?

A: Not necessarily, but they are transmuted into other forms
of energy. If we are trying to be good or peaceful, trying to
suppress or subdue our emotions, that is the basic twist of
ego in operation. We are being aggressive towards our emo-
tions, trying forcefully to achieve peace or goodness. Once
we cease being aggressive towards our emotions, cease trying
to change them, once we experience them properly, then trans-
mutation may take place. The irritating quality of the emo-
tions is transmuted once you experience them as they are.
Transmutation does not mean that the energy quality of the
emotions is eliminated; in fact it is transformed into wisdom,
which is very much needed.

Q: What about sexual tantra? Is that the process of trans-
muting sexual energy into something else?
A: It is the same thing. When the grasping quality of pas-

Tantra 237

sion or desire is transformed into open communication, a
dance, then the relationship of two people begins to develop
creatively rather than being stagnating or being irritating to
them.

Q: Does this principle of transmutation apply to sattvic and
rajasic and tamasic energy as described in the Hindu tradi-
tion? You don't want to take tamasic energy and turn it into
rajasic, but you take it and use it.

A: That's right, yes. It is very practical, actually. Generally
we tend to prepare too much. We say, "Once I make a lot of
money, then I will go somewhere to study and meditate and
become a priest," or whatever it is we would like to become.
But we never do it on the spot. We always speak in terms of,
"Once I do something, then . . ." We always plan too much.
We want to change our lives rather than use our lives, the
present moment, as part of the practice, and this hesitation
on our part creates a lot of setbacks in our spiritual practice.
Most of us have romantic ideas — "I'm bad now but one day,
when I change, I'll be good."

Q: Is the principle of transmutation expressed in art?
A: Yes. As we all know, similar combinations of colors and
patterns have been created by different people from different
cultures at different times. Spontaneous, expressive art auto-
matically has a universal quality. That is why you do not have
to go beyond anything. If you see fully and directly, then that
speaks, that brings some understanding. Choosing a green
light for go in traffic and a red light for stop, for danger,
suggests some kind of universality in the effect of color.

Q: What about dance and theater?

238 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

A: It is the same thing. The trouble is, if you become too
self-conscious in creating a work of art, then it ceases to be
a work of art. When masters of art are completely absorbed
in their work, they produce masterpieces, not because they
are aware of their teachers, but because they become com-
pletely absorbed in the work. They do not question, they just
do it. They produce the right thing quite accidentally.

Q: How is the fear or paranoia that interferes with spon-
taneity transmuted into action?

A: There are no special tricks involved in overcoming this
and overcoming that in order to achieve a certain state of
being. It is a question of leaping. When a person actually
understands that he is in a state of paranoia, then that im-
plies an underlying deep subconscious understanding of the
other side, some feeling of the other aspect of it in his mind.
Then he has to really take the leap. How to take the leap is
very difficult to explain in words; one simply has to do it. It is
rather like suddenly being pushed overboard into a river and
discovering that you can swim; you just swim across the river.
However, if you were to go back to the river and attempt to
practice, you probably would not be able to swim at all. It is
a question of spontaneity, of using the current intelligence.
One cannot explain taking the leap in words; it is beyond
words. But it is something that you will be able to do if you
really are willing to do it, if you put yourself in the situation
to leap and somehow surrender.

Q: If you are frightened and have a strong reaction to the
fear, you are aware of the reaction but don't want to get lost
in it, you want to remain conscious. How do you do it?
A: It is a question of first acknowledging that such energy

Tantra 239

is there, which is the energy to leap, as well. In other words,
instead of running away from fear, one must become com-
pletely involved in it and begin to feel the rough and rugged
quality of the emotion.

Q: Become a warrior?

A: Yes. At the beginning one might be satisfied with seeing
the absurdity of the emotion, which would disperse it. But
this is still not enough to effect the transmutation principle
of Vajrayana. One must see the "form is form" quality of the
emotions. Once you are able to look at the emotions properly,
from the point of view of "form is form, emotion is emotion,''
without your preconceptions attached, once you see the naked
quality of the emotions as they are, then you are ready to
leap. It does not need much effort. You are already delivered
to the leap, so to speak. This does not mean of course that, if
you are angry, you go out and commit murder.

Q: In other words, see the emotion as it is instead of involv-
ing yourself in a scattered, penetrating reaction to a situation.
A: Yes. You see, we do not actually see emotion properly,
although we are completely filled with it. If we follow our
emotions and escape them by doing something, that is not
experiencing them properly. We try to escape or repress our
emotions because we cannot bear to be in such a state. But the
Vajrayana speaks of looking properly, directly at the emotion
and feeling it, its naked quality. You do not actually have to
transmute. In fact, you see the already transmuted quality
in the emotions: "form is form." It is very subtle and quite
dangerous to just throw about.

Q: How does Milarepa's life fit into the pattern of Tantra?

240 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

He does not seem to practice transmutation, but rather, re-
nunciation.

A: Of course, in his life-style Milarepa is a classic example
of the yogi-renunciate tradition. But usually, when we think
of a renunciate, we think of someone who is trying to escape
the "evil" of the "worldly" life. This is not the case with
Milarepa at all. He was not trying to suppress his "evil" in-
clinations by meditating alone in the wilderness. He did not
lock himself into retreat. He was not trying to punish himself.
His asceticism was simply an expression of his character,
just as each of our life-styles is an expression of who we are,
determined by our psychologies and past histories. Milarepa
wanted to be simple and he led a very simple life.

Certainly there is a tendency on the part of people follow-
ing a religious path to become other-worldly for awhile, and
Milarepa was no exception. But people can do this in the
middle of a city. Wealthy people can spend a great deal of
money going on a religious "trip." But sooner or later, if a
person is going to really connect with the teachings, there must
be a return to the world. When Milarepa was meditating in
retreat, living very austerely, some hunters appeared by
chance and gave him some fresh venison. He ate it and his
meditation improved immediately. And later on, when he
was hesitating to come down to the cities, some villagers ap-
peared at his cave asking for teachings. He was continually
being drawn out of isolation by the seemingly accidental play
of life-situations, which one could say is the play of the guru,
the universality of guru, which always presents itself to us
naturally. We may be sitting in meditation in our New York
apartment, feeling very "high" and euphoric, very "spiri-
tual." But then we get up and walk into the streets and some-

Tantra 241

one steps on our toe and we have to deal with that. It brings
us down to earth, back to the world.

Milarepa was tremendously involved with the process of
transmutation of energies and emotions. In fact, when we read
The Hundred Thousand Songs of Milarepa, the whole first
part of the book is dealing with Milarepa's experience of this
process. In "The Tale of Red Rock Jewel Valley" Milarepa
had only recently left Marpa to go off and meditate alone.
This might be called his "adolescent stage," because he was
still involved with reliance upon a personal guru. Marpa was
still his "daddy." Having opened and surrendered to Marpa,
Milarepa still had to learn to transmute the emotions. He was
still clinging to the notions of "good" and "bad," and so the
world was still appearing to him in the guise of gods and
demons.

In "The Tale of Red Rock Jewel Valley," when Milarepa
went back into his cave after having a comforting vision of
Marpa, he was confronted with a gang of demons. He tried
every way he could think of to get rid of them, all kinds of
tactics. He threatened them, cajoled them, he even preached
the Dharma to them. But they would not leave until he ceased
regarding them as "bad" and opened to them, saw them as
they were. This was the beginning of Milarepa's period of
learning how to subjugate the demons, which is the same thing
as transmuting the emotions. It is with our emotions that we
create demons and gods: those things which we don't want in
our lives and world are the demons; those things which we
would draw to us are the gods and goddesses. The rest is just
scenery.

By being willing to accept the demons and gods and god-
desses as they are, Milarepa transmuted them. They became

242 Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism

dakinis, or the energies of life. The whole first part of The
Hundred Thousand Songs deals with Milarepa's mastery of
transmutation, his growing ability to open to the world as it
is, until he finally conquered all the demons in the chapter
"The Goddess Tserinma's Attack." In this chapter thousands
of demons assemble to terrify and attack Milarepa while he
is meditating, but he preaches to them, is open and accepting,
willing to offer them his whole being, and they are subjugated.
At one point five demonesses, beginning to realize that they
cannot frighten Milarepa, sing to him.

If the thought of demons

Never rises in your mind,

You need not fear the demon hosts around you.

It is most important to tame your mind within . .

On the steep path of fear and hope
They lie in ambush . .

And later Milarepa himself says, "Insofar as the Ultimate,
or the true nature of being is concerned, there are neither
Buddhas nor demons. He who frees himself from fear and
hope, evil and virtue, will realize the insubstantial and ground-
less nature of confusion. Samsara will then appear to be the
Mahamudra itself . .

The rest of The Hundred Thousand Songs deals with Mi-
larepa's development as a teacher and his relationships with
his students. Toward the end of his life he had completely

'Garma C. C. Chang, The Hundred Thousand Songs of Milarepa, (New York,
1962), p. 306.
= Ibid., p. 307.
' Ibid., p. 308.

Tantra 243

perfected the transmutation process to the point where he
could be called the Vidyadhara or "Holder of the Crazy
Wisdom." No longer could he be swayed by the winds of
hope and fear. The gods and goddesses and demons, his pas-
sions and their external projections, had been completely sub-
jugated and transformed. Now his life was a continual dance
with the dakinis.

Finally Milarepa reached the "old dog" stage, his highest
attainment. People could tread on him, use him as a road, as
earth; he would always be there. He transcended his own in-
dividual existence so that, as we read his last teachings, there
is a sense of the universality of Milarepa, the example of
enlightenment.

Index

Abhidharma, 231

abhisheka, 55, 57-9, 97. See also
initiation

Action, All-Accomplishing. See
Wisdoms, Five

adhishthana, 64—5

aggression, 98, 104-5, 125, 236; ex-
pression of, 48, 87, 107, 182; Vajra
and 224-5; in Hell Realm, 138-40,
146; in love, 101-2

alaya-vijnana, 122

ambition, 71-2, 89, 91, 147, 158-9, 207;

in meditation, 10-11, 153-5, 161. See

also struggle
Amitabha, color of, 117
anger. See aggression and vajra-anger
Animal Realm. See Realms, Six
arhals, 187, 190, 194
art, 53-4, 80; transmutation in, 237-38
"as it is", 49, 121, 168-70, 188, 191;

surrendering to, 26, 28, 69, 101; in

Tantra, 220. See also reality and

tathata

asceticism, 47-8, 83, 240. See also

disciplines, spiritual and renunciation

Asura Loka, 131-2, 142-3. See also
Realms, Six

atman, 193

atomism, 191-4

Avalokiteshvara, 187—8

avidya, 124. See also Skandhas, Five

awakened state, 65, 204—5; discovery of,
4-5, 9, 117, 153, 155, 181, 221; evalua-
tion of, 119; expressions of, 10; and
bodhisattva, 170. See also bodhi and
enlightenment

Awareness, Discriminating. See
Wisdoms, Five

awareness, panoramic, 74-5, 100, 113—4,
167-9; loss of, 197

basic ground, 70-1, 122-4, 229-30. See
also "being as you are" and openness

"being as you are", 20-1, 39, 103-4,

213-4. See also openness
"being here", 74, 203-4, 219; difficulty

of, 65-70, 72; as focus of meditation

practice, 155-7; in therapy, 88-9.

See also "as it is"
bhumi, 168. See also Bodhisattva Path
"big deal", 58, 96, 113-7.
"blackout", 124, 129, 130, 133-4. See

also ego, development of
bliss, 99, 113-4, 143,168,220; irrelevancy

of, 74-5; search for, 69-71, 79. See

also luminosity and virya
bodhi, 170, 199, 218. See also awakened

state and Bodhisattva Path
bodhisattva, transcendental activities of,

99, 102-3, 170-8
Bodhisattva Path, 99-103, 158, 167-84;

levels of, 170, 180-1, 217-19. See also

Mahayana
Bodhisattva-charyavatara, 175
Brahman, 193

Buddha, Gautama (Shakyamuni) , 26,
48, 160, 162, 164; and daughters of
Mara, 119; and Four Noble Truths,
119, 151; and Heart Sutra, 187-8,
190; and shamatha, 157; and teach-
ings, 19; and Three Lords of
Materialism, 8-11

Buddha, three "bodies" of, 231. See also
dharmakaya; nirmanakaya; and
sambhogakaya

Buddha Families, Five, 224-32
-^Buddha, 224, 229-30
—Karma, 224, 228-9
-^Padma, 224, 226-28
—Ratna, 224, 225-6, 231
—Vajra, 119, 224-5, 226

"Buddha activity", 19, 205. See also
karma

Buddha nature, 47, 156, 170. See also
intelligence, basic and tathagata-
garbha

246 Index

Buddhahood, 11, 65, 176

Buddhism, approach to spirituality of,
4—11, 121-2; distinctions between
Vehicles of, 18-9, 157-8, 168-9, 190-7,
208, 218-9, 224; Madhyamika school
of, 190-7; Yogachara school of, 194-6,
202. See also Hinayana; Mahayana;
Tantra; arerfVajrayana

categories, grasping nature of, 6, 14—5,
122, 127-8, 130. See also concepts;
conceptualization; ego, bureaucracy
of; evaluation; form; anrf precon-
ceptions

chakravartin, 177—8

chela, 18

Christ, 101, 182

Christian precepts, 58, 88

Christianity, 6, 191

cilta-matra school. See Buddhism,
yogachara school

clarity, of awakened state, 10; as
generosity, 97; of prajna, 147; as
shimyata, 197. See also precision

communication, allowing space for, 157,
161-2, 169, 180; compassion as, 98,
146-7, 209; generosity as, 171-2, 180;
grasping nature of, 158 ; pain of, 55,
81-82; surrender as, 28

communication with energy of life, 101,
103, 163, 222-4; with spiritual friend,
39-41, 45, 58, 64—5. See also openness
and surrender

communism, 6

compassion, 97-100, 105-6, 210-5;
Bodhisattva of, 187; clarity of, 97;
fearlessness of, 100, 107, 208, 213;
ruthlessness of, 210-1, 214-5 ; warmth
of, 97, 146-7, 208-9; directed by
prajna, 208—9. See also generosity

Concept. See Skandhas, Five

concepts, self-protective nature of, 6-7,
11, 127-8, 130; transcendence of, 163,
164, 217; in Madhyamika school, 191

conceptualization, absence of, 122—3,
187-90; avoiding, 72; cutting through,
10, 178, 187, 217-8; self-protective
nature of, 127-8, 130, 197; of experi-
ence, 116-7; in Hinayana thought,
194. See also categories; evaluation;
form ; and preconceptions

confidence, 21, 24, 99, 102, 198

confusion, cutting through, 4, 20, 133,
151, 156, 158-9, 233; reality of, 70,
148; as sense of self, 5, 56, 123, 195.
See also ego

consciousness, states of. See ego; enlight-
enment; Paramitas, Six; Realms, Six;
self-consciousness; and Skandhas, Five

dakini, 230, 241-3
Damema, 38

dana, 97—100. See also Paramitas, Six
death, 8, 112, 142, 143; awareness of, 134
defense mechanisms. See ego, self-preser-
vative quality of and security
demons, 46, 241-3

depression, 68—71. See also despair and
disappointment

desire, impulse of, 127, 129, 205; path
of, 98, 139-46, 180-1, 199-200; trans-
mutation of, 235-7. See also samsara

despair, 38, 95, 98

Deva Loka, 131, 143-5. See also Realms,

dharma, 17, 25, 26, 47-8, 105, 161, 187,
219. See also meditation and Truths,
Four Noble

dharma, living quality of, 17; miscon-
ception of, 161 ; personal expression of,
47-8; styles of presenting, 187; as
absence of aggression, 105 ; as law of
existence, 26; as transmutation of ego,
219. See also meditation and Truths,
Four Noble

Dharma, Wheel of, 151, 195, 220. See
also Truths, Four Noble

dharma body, 218. See also dharmakaya

dharmakaya, 218, 231. See also Buddha,
three "bodies" of

dhyana, 100, 143-4, 177. See also medita-
tion and Paramitas, Six

disappointment, 151—3; use of, 5, 25—6,
93, 158-9, 202-3. See also suffering

discipline, transcendental. See Para-
mitas, Six and shila

disciplines, spiritual; interest in, 3; mis-
use of, 7, 78-80, 83; purpose of, 47-8,
121-2, 153; and humor, 112-6. See
also meditation

dissatisfaction. See disappointment

divinities, protective, 230-3

dream, as self-deception, 65—69, 130-1,
139

drugs, 7, 78, 80, 137

dualistic meditation, 98, 153-4

duality, absence of; 123, 187-198, 208,
219-21; birth of, 123; dynamics of, 14,
123-48, 187-98; transcending of, 170-
8, 105, 219-21

diihkha, 119, 151-2, 159. See also suffer-
ing and Truths, Four Noble

eclecticism as function of spirtual ma-
terialism, 15-18, 22, 58, 79-81

ego, bureaucracy of, 15—7, 56, 73, 126—7;
development of, 122-48, 196-7; dis-
mantling of, 81, 155, 197, 232; distor-
tions of spiritual path by, 3, 7—8, 13—4,
56, 58-9, 63, 114, 119, 134, 158-9;

Index 247

Ego (Continued)

myth of, 5, 8-9, 69-70, 122-3, 128,
148, 168; rugged qualities of, 24-6, 28,
55, 239; self-preservative quality of, 6,
10-11, 21, 59-60, 86, 126-7, 200;
territory of, 60, 73, 142-4, 202, 208,
212-3; transcendence of, 4-5, 11, 151,
153, 178, 204-5, 219, 243

ego as pain shield, 5, 6, 56, 68, 80-1, 93,
126-7, 134; as spiritual advisor, 13-4,
134

egocentricity, 3, 92-3, 96

egohood, 7-8, 143-5

emotions, cutting through, 178; experi-
encing reality of, 70, 84, 89, 236, 239;
self protective nature of, 10-11, trans-
mutation of, 231-32, 235-39, 241-3; in
ego's development, 120, 167. See also
desire; fear; and love

emptiness. See shunyata and space

energy, categories of, 181. See also
Buddha Families, Five

energy, transcendental. See Paramitas,
Six and virya

energy, rajasic, 237; sattvic, 237; sexual,
236-7; solidification of, 126-9;
tamasic, 237; transmutation of, 219,
234-43; as focus in Tantra, 218-3;
and meditation practice, 9-11; of
primordial intelligence, 160

enlightenment, avoiding concentration
upon, 118-9; discovery of, 4^5, 11;
independent nature of, 4, 113; instant,
65, 93, 115, 117—118; misconceptions
of, 202; reverse, 133-4; self, 98; and
bodhisattva, 176; and Milarepa, 241-3.
See also awakened state; nirvana; and
samadhi

eternalists, 191-4, 198

evaluation, grasping nature of, 14—5, 58-
9, 66-72, 116-7, 172; irrelevancy of,
20, 187, 163; self -protective mechanism
of, 127-8, 130-1; spiritual attitude
toward, 112-5, 164, 188. See also con-
ceptualization

experience, contrasted to understanding,
84; examining, 9; holding onto, 65-70,
73 ; nature of, 187-91 ; as self-decep-
tion. 25-6; of spiritual path, 115

existentialism, 6

faith, 20-1, 95
fatalism, 192-3

fear, 48, 108; transmutation of, 238-9;

of failure, 142-3; of space, 22, 69-70,

140. See also paranoia
fearlessness. See compassion, fearless

aspect of
Feeling. See Skandhas, Five
form, 160, 207-8, 232; birth of, 123-6;

emptiness of, 188—90, 196; luminosity

of, 220-1; solidity of, 148; in medita-
tion, 154

Form, Lord of, 5-6, 8, 125. See also
Materialism, Three Lords of

Formless Gods, Realm of, 143-4. See
also Realms, Six

games, spiritual, 7, 23, 180, 215. See

also self-deception
Gampopa, 17
Ganesha, 253

generosity, transcendental. See dana and

Paramitas, Six
goal, truth of, 151, 153. See also Truths,

Four Noble
God, 4, 192-3

God Realm. See Deva Loka and Realms,
Six

Great Vehicle, 99. See also Mahayana
guru, 17-9, 31-50; initiation by, 54-9;
hunting of, 63; personality cult of,
44-5; preconceptions of, 23, 31, 39,
63-5, 91-7; reliance on, 241; sur-
render to, 23, 28, 37-9, 82-5 ; uni-
versality of, 45-6, 50, 240. See also
initiation and spiritual friend
gymnastics, mental, 9, 154, 200-1

liallucinations, 130-2, 134, 146, 148
"hard way", 77-89
hatred, 127, 130-1

Heaps, Five, 123. See also Skandhas, Five

Heart Sutra, 187, 198

Hell Realm. See Realms, Six

heroism, 78, 83-4, 86

heruka, 69, 230

Hinayana, 203, 224; practices, 98, 155-
7, 167, 194; thought, 193-4, 231. See
also Buddhism
Hinduism, 79, 160, 191, 237
Human Realm. See Realms, Six
humor, 111-8, 146, 147-8, 154
Hundred Thousand Songs of Milarepa,
241-3

Hungry Ghosts, Realm of. See Preta

Loka and Realms, Six
liypocrisy, 41-2, 46, 117-8. See also

self-deception

inconography, 117, 187, 213, 223; of
Buddha Families, 224-30; of guru,
230, 233-4; of protective divinities,
233-4; of yidams, 230-4

ideology, neurotic use of, 6, 8. See also
intellect

ignorance, 70, 127-8, 133-4

Ignorance, Birth of, 125. See also
Skandhas, Five

Ignorance, Self-Observing, 125. See also
Skandhas, Five

Ignorance-Form. See Skandhas, Five

248 Index

Ignorance Born Within, 125. See also

Skandhas, Five
illusion, 49, 122-3, 192
impermanence, Hinayana approach to,

193-4

India, 95; Marpa in, 32-6; meditation
of, 153-4; mythology of, 230-1

Indian, American, 79, 105

individual effort, necessity of, 17-8, 26-
7, 77-8, 89

individuality, 5-7, 48, 123-5, 240. See
also ego

initiation, 53-61, 63-5, 91. See also

abhisheka
inspiration, sources of, 17, 22, 162, 170
instinct, ape, 15, 86, 127, 134. See also

ego

instinct, awakened state as, 4, 160; use
of, 22

intellect, 6-8, 127-8, 141; proper use
of 54, 146. .See also conceptualization

intelligence. See Skandhas, Five and
vidya

intelligence, basic, 25, 46-7, 156, 159-
60, 162. 5ee also Buddha-nature and
tathagata-garbha

intelligence, primordial, 109, 127-8, 136,
218-20. See also yeshe

Islam, 191

.lealous Gods, Realm of. See Asura Loka

and Realms, Six
jnana, 109, 218, 235. See also wisdom,

crazy

joy. See bliss and virya

junkyard, spiritual. See eclecticism

Kagyu lineage, 17, 31, 48

Karma. See Buddha Families, Five

karma, law of, 146, 199-200, 203-4, 205;

as nihilistic invocation, 192-3
Karma Dzong, 3, 205
karuna, 146-7. See also compassion
Kayas, Three, 231

knowledge, experiencing of, 17-8, 35-6,
54

knowledge, transcendental. See Para-

mitas, Six and prajna
knowledge as spiritual materialism, 15-7.

See also eclecticism
Knyayoga Tantra of Vajramala, 218
kshand, 100. See also Paramitas
Kukuripa, 34-5

lama, 31, 53. See also guru and spiritual
friend

Lesser Vehicle, 157. See also Hinayana
"letting be", 9-10, 20, 125-6, 135, 158;

neces.sity of technique for, 153. See

also openness and self-trust
Lokas, Six, 131. See also Realms, Six

love, 100-2, 113, 211-3
himinosity, birth into, 217—20

Madhyamika school. See Buddhism and

"middle way"
Maha Ati, 232-3
Mahakala, 233
Mahamudra, 222, 242
Maharishi, 190

mahasukha, 220. See also bliss

mahavipashyana meditation. See aware-
ness, panoramic

Mahayana, 158 ; expansiveness of, 99,
168-9; and Tantra, 208, 218-9. See
also Bodhisattva Path and Buddhism

mandala, 69, 223-4; assignment of, 231-2

mantra, 39, 198-9, 232

Mara, daughters of, 58-9, 119, 231

Marpa, 17, 32-40, 45-6, 47-9, 69, 241

materialism, physical, 40, 61

materialism, spiritual. See spiritual
materialism

Materialism, Three Lords of, 5-11

maya, 192. See also illusion

meditation, compassionate aspect of, 97-
8, 105, 108-9; difficulty of, 135, 203;
discovering awakened state by, 4-5,
9-11, 74, 151, 169; ego's imitation of,
7; experiencing ego by, 15, 161; in-
significance of, 115-7; misconceptions
of, 9-10, 153; short-circuiting ego by,
21-2, 155 ; stages in practice of, 224.
See also dhyana; disciplines, spiritual;
Paramitas, Six; samadhi; and tech-
niques, spiritual

meditations, types of: concentration, 98,
153-4, 177; mahavipashyana, 168,
177; shamatha, 154r-7; vipashyana,
100, 167-8; Tantric, 231-2; upon
impermanence, 194

"meeting of two minds", 39, 42, 55, 58-9,
64-5, 77, 91-2. See also abhisheka

"middle way", 20, 40, 190-1. See also
Buddhism, Madhyamika school of

Milarepa, 17, 32, 37-40, 45-6, 239-43

Mind, Lord of, 5, 7-8. See also Material-
ism, Three Lords of

"mind only" school. See Buddhism,
Yogachara school and "one-mind"
theory

mind, ordinary, 59. See also thamal-gyi-

shepa and wisdom, ordinary
mind and matter, interrelation of, 79,

163-4

motivation, in the awakened state, 162-3.

See also ambition
mukti, 113

mystery, belief in, 21, 77-80, 91-2;
philosophical belief in, 192-3

Nagarjuna, 190-1, 195, 198

Index 249

Nalanda University, 32-3

Naropa, 17, 32-7, 40, 69, 96-7, 201, 221

nationalism, 6

neurosis, development of, 129, 148; work-
ing with, 9, 118, 151-4, 196-7. See
also ego

Ngonagpa of Langru, 114-5

nihilism, 191-4, 198, 202

nirmanakaya, 231. See also Buddha,
three "bodies" of

nirvana, 113, 145, 205-6, 220. See also
enlightenment and samadhi,

non-duality, 207-8, 220. See also duality
and shunyata

non-dwelling, 177, 179, 190-5, 218

non-striving, 71-2, 153, 161, 176. See
also: "letting be"; struggle; sur-
render; and Truths, Four Noble

"one-mind" theory, 194-6, 202. See also
Buddhism, Yogachara school

"open way", 91-109, 168-9; compassion
of, 96-109. See also Bodhisattva Path;
Mahayana; and openness

openness, loss of, 65—70, 122—4; necessity
of spiritual friend for, 83; pain of, 81-
2; use of disappointment to achieve,
25, 41-2, 71-2, 91-3

openness and Bodhisattva Path, 99—103,
169-77; and Gautama Buddha, 9, 19,
162 ; and shunyata, 197-9 ; as sur-
lender to spiritual friend, 24, 28, 37,
39-46, 55-6, 58-9. See also communi-
cation; "open way"; initiation; shun-
yata; space; and surrender

openness, transcendental. See dhyana
and Paramitas, Six

ordinariness, as expression of basic
sanity, 47-9, 59, 67-9, 92, 116. See also
non-striving and wisdom, ordinary
osel, 220. See also luminosity

Padma. See Buddha Families, Five

pain, 8, 111, 119, 134; origin of, 151-3,
162: of unmasking, 55, 71, 81-2, 84;
as expression of guru, 50, 89. See also
"hard way" and suffering

paramita, definition of, 170

Paramitas, Six, 99-100, 170-8; interde-
pendence of, 174, 178-9
—discipline, 100, 170, 173-4. See also
shila

—energy, 11, 100, 170, 175-7, 181-2.

See also virya
—generosity, 99-100, 170-3. See also

dana

—knowledge, 100, 146-7, 168, 177-8,

198. See also prajna
—meditation, 100, 177, 179. See also

dhyana

—patience, 100, 170, 174-5. See also

kshanti

See also Bodhisattva Path
paranoia, giving up one's, 102—4, 238;

of ego, 4-5, 74, 132, 162; of Karma

Family, 228 ; after self-deception, 93.

See also neurosis
passion, 141, 226. See also desire and

emotions

path, spiritual. See dharma and medita-
tion

path, truth of, 151, 153-7, 161. See also
dharma and Truths, Four Noble

patience, 156-59, 161

patience, transcendental. See kshanti
and Paramitas, Six

peace, invincible quality of, 198, 217, 223

perception, 6-7, 122-3, 136-7, 183, 196-
7; symbolism of, 163, 222—4. See also
conceptualization; self, sense of; and
Skandhas, Five

philosophy as function of spiritual ma-
terialism, 14—15. See also eclecticism

pleasure, attitudes toward, 147—8; search
for, 5-6, 139-42, 152; as expression of
guru, 50. See also bliss and security

prabhasvara, 220. See also luminosity

prajna, cutting nature of, 177-8, 187;
double nature of, 177-8 ; and com-
passion, 208-11, 215; as knowledge of
situations, 100, 108, 179-80; as transi-
toriness of ego, 168. See also Para-
mitas, Six

Prainaparamita scriptures, 195

Prajnaparamita-hridaya, 187. See also
Heart Sutra

prayer, 7

precision, loss of, 59-124; meditation on,
155-7, 160, 167-8; of disappointment,
25; as quality of awakened state, 10,
74, 123, 147, 179

preconceptions, dwelling on, 154—5, 164;
transcendence of, 178, 198, 207, 239;
of guru, 23—5 ; of spiritual path, 121—2,
158-9

Preta Loka, 132, 139-40. See also

Realms, Six
pride, spiritual, 4. See also ego and

egohood

projections, 131, 168, 243; illusory union

with, 144—5. See also Realms, Six
psychotherapy, 7, 14, 88-9

rakshasas, 230—1

Ratna. See Buddha Families, Five

reality, nature of, 48-9, 188-97, 218-24.
See also "as it is"

realization, 33. See also enlightenment

Realms, Six, 128, 131-48, 167
—Animal, 131, 132, 140-1, 145
—God, 131, 132, 143-5, 177. See also
Deva Loka

250 Index

Realms (Continued)
—Hell, 132-3, 138-9, 140, 146
—Human, 131, 132, 141-2, 145, 146
—Hungry Ghosts, 132, 139-40. See

also Preta Loka
—Jealous Gods, 131-2, 142-3, 145.
See also Asura Loka

Red Rock Jewel Valley, 45-6, 241

renunciation, living-quality of, 198-9,
240; as spiritual game, 41, 115-6, 163

rigidity, 157, 173-4. See also seriousness

rishi, 190

Rudra, 231

saraadhi, 119, 133-4, 154-5, 176, 205-6.

See also meditation
samadhi, vajra-like, 119, 181, 218
sambhogakaya, 231

samsara, circle of, 146, 159; nirvana in,
220-1, 232, 242. See also ego, develop-
ment of

samsaric mind, 58; highest level of, 144
sangha, 26—7, 53
sanity, basic, 9-11, 47-8, 153
Sanskrit, 32, 55, 123, 151-2, 187, 197, 220
satori, 117-8. See also enlightenment,
instant

security, mechanisms of, 5-6, 125-7, 56,
59-60, 91-2, 152, 211. See also ego,
self-preservation quality of

self, the. See ego

self-acceptance, 28, 64, 160. See also
"being as you are" and self-trust
self-consciousness, 5, 7, 42-3, 111, 143-4,
208; birth of, 123-5; in art, 238; and
bodhisattva, 172. See also ego and
self-watching
self-criticism, 24, 93, 132-3, 142-3
self-deception, 54-5, 63-75, 83, 91-7, 134
self-destruction, 20
self-luminous cognition, 194~6
self-trust, 20, 97-109. See also confidence
self-watching, 21-2, 59-60, 70-1, 73-5,
106, 111, 119, 125, 161, 169; trans-
muted by prajna, 178. See also ego
and evaluation
seriousness as aspect of spiritual ma-
terialism, 14, 111-9, 154. See also
rigidity

shamatha meditation. See meditations
Shantideva, 106, 175
Shariputra, 187-8

shelter, search for, 26-7, 125. See also
security

shila, 100, 173-4. See also Pararaitas, Six
shopping, spiritual. See eclecticism
shunyata, 187-206; death of, 217-9; ex-
periencing of, 187, 190, 197, 201-2,
234; and form, 188-90, 196-9, 207-8;
relative to samsara, 220-1 ; in Tantric
thought, 217-21, 224, 231-2. See also

openness and space
simplicity, loss of, 14-5, 22, 124-5
Sitting Bull, 105

Skandhas, Five, 123-8, 151, 219-20. See
also Realms, Six
—Concept, 127-8, 130
— Consciousness, 128, 130-1, 133, 145,
167

—Feeling, 126, 128, 130

— Ignorance-Form, 123-4, 133-4

—Perception-Impulse, 126-7, 128, 130

skillful means, 187, 210

soul, 193

space, dwelling upon, 143-4; fear of, 22,
69-70; solidification of, 122-6, 128-9,
133-4, 146-8; for communication, 157,
161-2, 180; in mahavipashyana medi-
tation, 168-9; relative to form, 160-1

Speech, Lord of, 5-8. See also Material-
ism, Three Lords of

spiritual friend, necessity of, 83, 87-9;
stages of meeting, 41-7; distinct from
"guru", 39-40. See also guru

spiritual materialism, consequences of,
7-8; definition of, 3; escaping, 158-9;
seduction of. 119

spiritual path. See dharma and medita-
tion

spirituality, Buddhist overview of, 4-11
spontaneity of awakened state, 169; of
bodhisattva action, 103, 182, 238; in
communication, 162; and meditation,
10, 97

stupidity, impulse of, 127, 130; realm of,
140; distinct from ignorance, 125

struggle, absence of, 9, 11, 100-3; futility
of, 23, 71-2; 135, 136; ironic character
of, 112-5; maintaining ego by, 5,86-7;
as origin of suffering, 152-3

surrender, 238; necessity of spiritual
friend for, 87-8; pain of, 81; and
Bodhisattva Path, 99, 198; to guru, 23,
37-9, 82-5 ; of preconceptions, 23-8

suffering, origin of, 152-3, 195; realiza-
tion of, 8, 119, 151-3, 159; truth of,
151-2, 162; truth of origin of, 151-3,
162. See also duhkha; pain; and
Truths, Four Noble

.symbolism. See iconography and per-
ception

Tantra, 47, 217-43; categories of energy
in, 224-30; iconography of, 223, 230-
4; Lower, 222; practices of, 231-2;
principle of transmutation in, 218-23,
230-241 ; transition from Mahayana
to, 208, 218-9. See also Buddhism
and Vajrayana

tathagata, 169-70

tathagata-garbha, 47. See also Buddha-
nature and intelligence, basic

Index 251

tathata, 169-70, 191, 220. See also "as
it is"

teacliei-. See guru and spiritual friend

techniques, spiritual, 22, 73, 160; falling
away of, 197; insufficiency of, 160;
strengthening ego by, 3, 7. See also :
asceticism; disciplines, spiritual ; gym-
nastics, mental

thamal-gyi-shepa, 59, 220. See also
wisdom, ordinary

theism, 4, 191-2

thoughts, discursive: communication
and, 162; meditation and, 10, 133, 151,
161, 167; as defense mechanism of ego,
10, 122, 197; origination of, 122-8,
151-3

thoughts, subconscious, 233

Tibet, Marpa and, 32-6; meditation of,

153-4; Trungpa Tulku and, 18-9, 53
Tibetan language, 32, 109, 187, 205, 220;

lore, 5, 17, 43, 114-5, 121, 209; people,

79

Tilopa, 17, 33, 96-7, 221
transcendence, 172, 220. See also ego,

transcendence of
transcendental discipline. See Paramitas,

Six and shila
transcendental energy. See Paramitas,

Six and virya
transcendental generosity. See dana and

Paramitas, Six
transcendental knowledge. See Para-
mitas, Six and prajna
transcendental meditation. See dhyana

and Paramitas, Six
transcendental patience. See kshanti and

Paramitas, Six
transmutation, principle of, 178. See

also Tantra
irishula, 231
Trungpa Tulku, 53
Truths, Four Noble, 119, 151-164

— First Noble Truth. See duhkha and
suffering

— Second Noble Truth. See suffering,
origin of

"Third Noble Truth. See goal, truth

of and non-striving
— Fourth Noble Truth. See dharma

and path, truth of

upaya, 212. See also skillful means

Vajra, 119. See also Buddha Families,

Five
vajra, anger, 234

Vajrayana, 224, 239. See also Buddhism

and Tantra
Vedantism, 191

vidya, 123-4. See also Skandhas, Five
Vidyadhara, 243

vipashyana meditation. See meditations
vipassana meditation. See meditations,

vipashyana
virya, 100, 175-7. See also Paramitas, Six

"what is". See "as it is" and tathata
wisdom, crazy, 109, 210, 230, 243. See

also jnana
wisdom, ordinary, 220. See also thamal-
gyi-shepa

Wisdoms, Five, 229, 231 ; Mirror-like,
224—5; of All-Accomplishing Action,
228-9; of All-Encompassing Space,
229; of Discriminating Awareness,
226-7; of Equanimity, 223, 225. See
also Buddha Families, Five

"working on oneself", excesses of, 94-6,
104; limits of, 63~4; necessity of
individual, 77-8, 89

world. See reality

yana, 99; Three Yanas, 224
yeshe, 109. See also intelligence, pri-
mordial
yidams, 230-3
yoga, 7, 15, 94, 160
Yogachara school. See Buddhism

Zen, 48-9, 79, 80, 190, 232-3